1/* tc-hppa.c -- Assemble for the PA
2   Copyright 1989, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
3   2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4
5   This file is part of GAS, the GNU Assembler.
6
7   GAS is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
8   it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
9   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
10   any later version.
11
12   GAS is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
13   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
14   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
15   GNU General Public License for more details.
16
17   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
18   along with GAS; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to the Free
19   Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
20   02110-1301, USA.  */
21
22/* HP PA-RISC support was contributed by the Center for Software Science
23   at the University of Utah.  */
24
25#include <stdio.h>
26
27#include "as.h"
28#include "safe-ctype.h"
29#include "subsegs.h"
30
31#include "bfd/libhppa.h"
32
33/* Be careful, this file includes data *declarations*.  */
34#include "opcode/hppa.h"
35
36#if defined (OBJ_ELF) && defined (OBJ_SOM)
37error only one of OBJ_ELF and OBJ_SOM can be defined
38#endif
39
40/* If we are using ELF, then we probably can support dwarf2 debug
41   records.  Furthermore, if we are supporting dwarf2 debug records,
42   then we want to use the assembler support for compact line numbers.  */
43#ifdef OBJ_ELF
44#include "dwarf2dbg.h"
45
46/* A "convenient" place to put object file dependencies which do
47   not need to be seen outside of tc-hppa.c.  */
48
49/* Object file formats specify relocation types.  */
50typedef enum elf_hppa_reloc_type reloc_type;
51
52/* Object file formats specify BFD symbol types.  */
53typedef elf_symbol_type obj_symbol_type;
54#define symbol_arg_reloc_info(sym)\
55  (((obj_symbol_type *) symbol_get_bfdsym (sym))->tc_data.hppa_arg_reloc)
56
57#if TARGET_ARCH_SIZE == 64
58/* How to generate a relocation.  */
59#define hppa_gen_reloc_type _bfd_elf64_hppa_gen_reloc_type
60#define elf_hppa_reloc_final_type elf64_hppa_reloc_final_type
61#else
62#define hppa_gen_reloc_type _bfd_elf32_hppa_gen_reloc_type
63#define elf_hppa_reloc_final_type elf32_hppa_reloc_final_type
64#endif
65
66/* ELF objects can have versions, but apparently do not have anywhere
67   to store a copyright string.  */
68#define obj_version obj_elf_version
69#define obj_copyright obj_elf_version
70
71#define UNWIND_SECTION_NAME ".PARISC.unwind"
72#endif /* OBJ_ELF */
73
74#ifdef OBJ_SOM
75/* Names of various debugging spaces/subspaces.  */
76#define GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME "$GDB_DEBUG$"
77#define GDB_STRINGS_SUBSPACE_NAME "$GDB_STRINGS$"
78#define GDB_SYMBOLS_SUBSPACE_NAME "$GDB_SYMBOLS$"
79#define UNWIND_SECTION_NAME "$UNWIND$"
80
81/* Object file formats specify relocation types.  */
82typedef int reloc_type;
83
84/* SOM objects can have both a version string and a copyright string.  */
85#define obj_version obj_som_version
86#define obj_copyright obj_som_copyright
87
88/* How to generate a relocation.  */
89#define hppa_gen_reloc_type hppa_som_gen_reloc_type
90
91/* Object file formats specify BFD symbol types.  */
92typedef som_symbol_type obj_symbol_type;
93#define symbol_arg_reloc_info(sym)\
94  (((obj_symbol_type *) symbol_get_bfdsym (sym))->tc_data.ap.hppa_arg_reloc)
95
96/* This apparently isn't in older versions of hpux reloc.h.  */
97#ifndef R_DLT_REL
98#define R_DLT_REL 0x78
99#endif
100
101#ifndef R_N0SEL
102#define R_N0SEL 0xd8
103#endif
104
105#ifndef R_N1SEL
106#define R_N1SEL 0xd9
107#endif
108#endif /* OBJ_SOM */
109
110#if TARGET_ARCH_SIZE == 64
111#define DEFAULT_LEVEL 25
112#else
113#define DEFAULT_LEVEL 10
114#endif
115
116/* Various structures and types used internally in tc-hppa.c.  */
117
118/* Unwind table and descriptor.  FIXME: Sync this with GDB version.  */
119
120struct unwind_desc
121  {
122    unsigned int cannot_unwind:1;
123    unsigned int millicode:1;
124    unsigned int millicode_save_rest:1;
125    unsigned int region_desc:2;
126    unsigned int save_sr:2;
127    unsigned int entry_fr:4;
128    unsigned int entry_gr:5;
129    unsigned int args_stored:1;
130    unsigned int call_fr:5;
131    unsigned int call_gr:5;
132    unsigned int save_sp:1;
133    unsigned int save_rp:1;
134    unsigned int save_rp_in_frame:1;
135    unsigned int extn_ptr_defined:1;
136    unsigned int cleanup_defined:1;
137
138    unsigned int hpe_interrupt_marker:1;
139    unsigned int hpux_interrupt_marker:1;
140    unsigned int reserved:3;
141    unsigned int frame_size:27;
142  };
143
144/* We can't rely on compilers placing bitfields in any particular
145   place, so use these macros when dumping unwind descriptors to
146   object files.  */
147#define UNWIND_LOW32(U) \
148  (((U)->cannot_unwind << 31)		\
149   | ((U)->millicode << 30)		\
150   | ((U)->millicode_save_rest << 29)	\
151   | ((U)->region_desc << 27)		\
152   | ((U)->save_sr << 25)		\
153   | ((U)->entry_fr << 21)		\
154   | ((U)->entry_gr << 16)		\
155   | ((U)->args_stored << 15)		\
156   | ((U)->call_fr << 10)		\
157   | ((U)->call_gr << 5)		\
158   | ((U)->save_sp << 4)		\
159   | ((U)->save_rp << 3)		\
160   | ((U)->save_rp_in_frame << 2)	\
161   | ((U)->extn_ptr_defined << 1)	\
162   | ((U)->cleanup_defined << 0))
163
164#define UNWIND_HIGH32(U) \
165  (((U)->hpe_interrupt_marker << 31)	\
166   | ((U)->hpux_interrupt_marker << 30)	\
167   | ((U)->frame_size << 0))
168
169struct unwind_table
170  {
171    /* Starting and ending offsets of the region described by
172       descriptor.  */
173    unsigned int start_offset;
174    unsigned int end_offset;
175    struct unwind_desc descriptor;
176  };
177
178/* This structure is used by the .callinfo, .enter, .leave pseudo-ops to
179   control the entry and exit code they generate. It is also used in
180   creation of the correct stack unwind descriptors.
181
182   NOTE:  GAS does not support .enter and .leave for the generation of
183   prologues and epilogues.  FIXME.
184
185   The fields in structure roughly correspond to the arguments available on the
186   .callinfo pseudo-op.  */
187
188struct call_info
189  {
190    /* The unwind descriptor being built.  */
191    struct unwind_table ci_unwind;
192
193    /* Name of this function.  */
194    symbolS *start_symbol;
195
196    /* (temporary) symbol used to mark the end of this function.  */
197    symbolS *end_symbol;
198
199    /* Next entry in the chain.  */
200    struct call_info *ci_next;
201  };
202
203/* Operand formats for FP instructions.   Note not all FP instructions
204   allow all four formats to be used (for example fmpysub only allows
205   SGL and DBL).  */
206typedef enum
207  {
208    SGL, DBL, ILLEGAL_FMT, QUAD, W, UW, DW, UDW, QW, UQW
209  }
210fp_operand_format;
211
212/* This fully describes the symbol types which may be attached to
213   an EXPORT or IMPORT directive.  Only SOM uses this formation
214   (ELF has no need for it).  */
215typedef enum
216  {
217    SYMBOL_TYPE_UNKNOWN,
218    SYMBOL_TYPE_ABSOLUTE,
219    SYMBOL_TYPE_CODE,
220    SYMBOL_TYPE_DATA,
221    SYMBOL_TYPE_ENTRY,
222    SYMBOL_TYPE_MILLICODE,
223    SYMBOL_TYPE_PLABEL,
224    SYMBOL_TYPE_PRI_PROG,
225    SYMBOL_TYPE_SEC_PROG,
226  }
227pa_symbol_type;
228
229/* This structure contains information needed to assemble
230   individual instructions.  */
231struct pa_it
232  {
233    /* Holds the opcode after parsing by pa_ip.  */
234    unsigned long opcode;
235
236    /* Holds an expression associated with the current instruction.  */
237    expressionS exp;
238
239    /* Does this instruction use PC-relative addressing.  */
240    int pcrel;
241
242    /* Floating point formats for operand1 and operand2.  */
243    fp_operand_format fpof1;
244    fp_operand_format fpof2;
245
246    /* Whether or not we saw a truncation request on an fcnv insn.  */
247    int trunc;
248
249    /* Holds the field selector for this instruction
250       (for example L%, LR%, etc).  */
251    long field_selector;
252
253    /* Holds any argument relocation bits associated with this
254       instruction.  (instruction should be some sort of call).  */
255    unsigned int arg_reloc;
256
257    /* The format specification for this instruction.  */
258    int format;
259
260    /* The relocation (if any) associated with this instruction.  */
261    reloc_type reloc;
262  };
263
264/* PA-89 floating point registers are arranged like this:
265
266   +--------------+--------------+
267   |   0 or 16L   |  16 or 16R   |
268   +--------------+--------------+
269   |   1 or 17L   |  17 or 17R   |
270   +--------------+--------------+
271   |              |              |
272
273   .              .              .
274   .              .              .
275   .              .              .
276
277   |              |              |
278   +--------------+--------------+
279   |  14 or 30L   |  30 or 30R   |
280   +--------------+--------------+
281   |  15 or 31L   |  31 or 31R   |
282   +--------------+--------------+  */
283
284/* Additional information needed to build argument relocation stubs.  */
285struct call_desc
286  {
287    /* The argument relocation specification.  */
288    unsigned int arg_reloc;
289
290    /* Number of arguments.  */
291    unsigned int arg_count;
292  };
293
294#ifdef OBJ_SOM
295/* This structure defines an entry in the subspace dictionary
296   chain.  */
297
298struct subspace_dictionary_chain
299  {
300    /* Nonzero if this space has been defined by the user code.  */
301    unsigned int ssd_defined;
302
303    /* Name of this subspace.  */
304    char *ssd_name;
305
306    /* GAS segment and subsegment associated with this subspace.  */
307    asection *ssd_seg;
308    int ssd_subseg;
309
310    /* Next space in the subspace dictionary chain.  */
311    struct subspace_dictionary_chain *ssd_next;
312  };
313
314typedef struct subspace_dictionary_chain ssd_chain_struct;
315
316/* This structure defines an entry in the subspace dictionary
317   chain.  */
318
319struct space_dictionary_chain
320  {
321    /* Nonzero if this space has been defined by the user code or
322       as a default space.  */
323    unsigned int sd_defined;
324
325    /* Nonzero if this spaces has been defined by the user code.  */
326    unsigned int sd_user_defined;
327
328    /* The space number (or index).  */
329    unsigned int sd_spnum;
330
331    /* The name of this subspace.  */
332    char *sd_name;
333
334    /* GAS segment to which this subspace corresponds.  */
335    asection *sd_seg;
336
337    /* Current subsegment number being used.  */
338    int sd_last_subseg;
339
340    /* The chain of subspaces contained within this space.  */
341    ssd_chain_struct *sd_subspaces;
342
343    /* The next entry in the space dictionary chain.  */
344    struct space_dictionary_chain *sd_next;
345  };
346
347typedef struct space_dictionary_chain sd_chain_struct;
348
349/* This structure defines attributes of the default subspace
350   dictionary entries.  */
351
352struct default_subspace_dict
353  {
354    /* Name of the subspace.  */
355    char *name;
356
357    /* FIXME.  Is this still needed?  */
358    char defined;
359
360    /* Nonzero if this subspace is loadable.  */
361    char loadable;
362
363    /* Nonzero if this subspace contains only code.  */
364    char code_only;
365
366    /* Nonzero if this is a comdat subspace.  */
367    char comdat;
368
369    /* Nonzero if this is a common subspace.  */
370    char common;
371
372    /* Nonzero if this is a common subspace which allows symbols
373       to be multiply defined.  */
374    char dup_common;
375
376    /* Nonzero if this subspace should be zero filled.  */
377    char zero;
378
379    /* Sort key for this subspace.  */
380    unsigned char sort;
381
382    /* Access control bits for this subspace.  Can represent RWX access
383       as well as privilege level changes for gateways.  */
384    int access;
385
386    /* Index of containing space.  */
387    int space_index;
388
389    /* Alignment (in bytes) of this subspace.  */
390    int alignment;
391
392    /* Quadrant within space where this subspace should be loaded.  */
393    int quadrant;
394
395    /* An index into the default spaces array.  */
396    int def_space_index;
397
398    /* Subsegment associated with this subspace.  */
399    subsegT subsegment;
400  };
401
402/* This structure defines attributes of the default space
403   dictionary entries.  */
404
405struct default_space_dict
406  {
407    /* Name of the space.  */
408    char *name;
409
410    /* Space number.  It is possible to identify spaces within
411       assembly code numerically!  */
412    int spnum;
413
414    /* Nonzero if this space is loadable.  */
415    char loadable;
416
417    /* Nonzero if this space is "defined".  FIXME is still needed */
418    char defined;
419
420    /* Nonzero if this space can not be shared.  */
421    char private;
422
423    /* Sort key for this space.  */
424    unsigned char sort;
425
426    /* Segment associated with this space.  */
427    asection *segment;
428  };
429#endif
430
431/* Structure for previous label tracking.  Needed so that alignments,
432   callinfo declarations, etc can be easily attached to a particular
433   label.  */
434typedef struct label_symbol_struct
435  {
436    struct symbol *lss_label;
437#ifdef OBJ_SOM
438    sd_chain_struct *lss_space;
439#endif
440#ifdef OBJ_ELF
441    segT lss_segment;
442#endif
443    struct label_symbol_struct *lss_next;
444  }
445label_symbol_struct;
446
447/* Extra information needed to perform fixups (relocations) on the PA.  */
448struct hppa_fix_struct
449  {
450    /* The field selector.  */
451    enum hppa_reloc_field_selector_type_alt fx_r_field;
452
453    /* Type of fixup.  */
454    int fx_r_type;
455
456    /* Format of fixup.  */
457    int fx_r_format;
458
459    /* Argument relocation bits.  */
460    unsigned int fx_arg_reloc;
461
462    /* The segment this fixup appears in.  */
463    segT segment;
464  };
465
466/* Structure to hold information about predefined registers.  */
467
468struct pd_reg
469  {
470    char *name;
471    int value;
472  };
473
474/* This structure defines the mapping from a FP condition string
475   to a condition number which can be recorded in an instruction.  */
476struct fp_cond_map
477  {
478    char *string;
479    int cond;
480  };
481
482/* This structure defines a mapping from a field selector
483   string to a field selector type.  */
484struct selector_entry
485  {
486    char *prefix;
487    int field_selector;
488  };
489
490/* Prototypes for functions local to tc-hppa.c.  */
491
492#ifdef OBJ_SOM
493static void pa_check_current_space_and_subspace PARAMS ((void));
494#endif
495
496#if !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD)))
497static void pa_text PARAMS ((int));
498static void pa_data PARAMS ((int));
499static void pa_comm PARAMS ((int));
500#endif
501static fp_operand_format pa_parse_fp_format PARAMS ((char **s));
502static void pa_cons PARAMS ((int));
503static void pa_float_cons PARAMS ((int));
504static void pa_fill PARAMS ((int));
505static void pa_lcomm PARAMS ((int));
506static void pa_lsym PARAMS ((int));
507static void pa_stringer PARAMS ((int));
508static void pa_version PARAMS ((int));
509static int pa_parse_fp_cmp_cond PARAMS ((char **));
510static int get_expression PARAMS ((char *));
511static int pa_get_absolute_expression PARAMS ((struct pa_it *, char **));
512static int evaluate_absolute PARAMS ((struct pa_it *));
513static unsigned int pa_build_arg_reloc PARAMS ((char *));
514static unsigned int pa_align_arg_reloc PARAMS ((unsigned int, unsigned int));
515static int pa_parse_nullif PARAMS ((char **));
516static int pa_parse_nonneg_cmpsub_cmpltr PARAMS ((char **));
517static int pa_parse_neg_cmpsub_cmpltr PARAMS ((char **));
518static int pa_parse_neg_add_cmpltr PARAMS ((char **));
519static int pa_parse_nonneg_add_cmpltr PARAMS ((char **));
520static int pa_parse_cmpb_64_cmpltr PARAMS ((char **));
521static int pa_parse_cmpib_64_cmpltr PARAMS ((char **));
522static int pa_parse_addb_64_cmpltr PARAMS ((char **));
523static void pa_block PARAMS ((int));
524static void pa_brtab PARAMS ((int));
525static void pa_try PARAMS ((int));
526static void pa_call PARAMS ((int));
527static void pa_call_args PARAMS ((struct call_desc *));
528static void pa_callinfo PARAMS ((int));
529static void pa_copyright PARAMS ((int));
530static void pa_end PARAMS ((int));
531static void pa_enter PARAMS ((int));
532static void pa_entry PARAMS ((int));
533static void pa_equ PARAMS ((int));
534static void pa_exit PARAMS ((int));
535static void pa_export PARAMS ((int));
536static void pa_type_args PARAMS ((symbolS *, int));
537static void pa_import PARAMS ((int));
538static void pa_label PARAMS ((int));
539static void pa_leave PARAMS ((int));
540static void pa_level PARAMS ((int));
541static void pa_origin PARAMS ((int));
542static void pa_proc PARAMS ((int));
543static void pa_procend PARAMS ((int));
544static void pa_param PARAMS ((int));
545static void pa_undefine_label PARAMS ((void));
546static int need_pa11_opcode PARAMS ((void));
547static int pa_parse_number PARAMS ((char **, int));
548static label_symbol_struct *pa_get_label PARAMS ((void));
549#ifdef OBJ_SOM
550static int exact_log2 PARAMS ((int));
551static void pa_compiler PARAMS ((int));
552static void pa_align PARAMS ((int));
553static void pa_space PARAMS ((int));
554static void pa_spnum PARAMS ((int));
555static void pa_subspace PARAMS ((int));
556static sd_chain_struct *create_new_space PARAMS ((char *, int, int,
557						  int, int, int,
558						  asection *, int));
559static ssd_chain_struct *create_new_subspace PARAMS ((sd_chain_struct *,
560						      char *, int, int,
561						      int, int, int, int,
562						      int, int, int, int,
563						      int, asection *));
564static ssd_chain_struct *update_subspace PARAMS ((sd_chain_struct *,
565						  char *, int, int, int,
566						  int, int, int, int,
567						  int, int, int, int,
568						  asection *));
569static sd_chain_struct *is_defined_space PARAMS ((char *));
570static ssd_chain_struct *is_defined_subspace PARAMS ((char *));
571static sd_chain_struct *pa_segment_to_space PARAMS ((asection *));
572static ssd_chain_struct *pa_subsegment_to_subspace PARAMS ((asection *,
573							    subsegT));
574static sd_chain_struct *pa_find_space_by_number PARAMS ((int));
575static unsigned int pa_subspace_start PARAMS ((sd_chain_struct *, int));
576static sd_chain_struct *pa_parse_space_stmt PARAMS ((char *, int));
577static void pa_spaces_begin PARAMS ((void));
578#endif
579static void pa_ip PARAMS ((char *));
580static void fix_new_hppa PARAMS ((fragS *, int, int, symbolS *,
581				  offsetT, expressionS *, int,
582				  bfd_reloc_code_real_type,
583				  enum hppa_reloc_field_selector_type_alt,
584				  int, unsigned int, int));
585static int is_end_of_statement PARAMS ((void));
586static int reg_name_search PARAMS ((char *));
587static int pa_chk_field_selector PARAMS ((char **));
588static int is_same_frag PARAMS ((fragS *, fragS *));
589static void process_exit PARAMS ((void));
590static unsigned int pa_stringer_aux PARAMS ((char *));
591static fp_operand_format pa_parse_fp_cnv_format PARAMS ((char **s));
592static int pa_parse_ftest_gfx_completer PARAMS ((char **));
593
594#ifdef OBJ_ELF
595static void hppa_elf_mark_end_of_function PARAMS ((void));
596static void pa_build_unwind_subspace PARAMS ((struct call_info *));
597static void pa_vtable_entry PARAMS ((int));
598static void pa_vtable_inherit  PARAMS ((int));
599#endif
600
601/* File and globally scoped variable declarations.  */
602
603#ifdef OBJ_SOM
604/* Root and final entry in the space chain.  */
605static sd_chain_struct *space_dict_root;
606static sd_chain_struct *space_dict_last;
607
608/* The current space and subspace.  */
609static sd_chain_struct *current_space;
610static ssd_chain_struct *current_subspace;
611#endif
612
613/* Root of the call_info chain.  */
614static struct call_info *call_info_root;
615
616/* The last call_info (for functions) structure
617   seen so it can be associated with fixups and
618   function labels.  */
619static struct call_info *last_call_info;
620
621/* The last call description (for actual calls).  */
622static struct call_desc last_call_desc;
623
624/* handle of the OPCODE hash table */
625static struct hash_control *op_hash = NULL;
626
627/* These characters can be suffixes of opcode names and they may be
628   followed by meaningful whitespace.  We don't include `,' and `!'
629   as they never appear followed by meaningful whitespace.  */
630const char hppa_symbol_chars[] = "*?=<>";
631
632/* Table of pseudo ops for the PA.  FIXME -- how many of these
633   are now redundant with the overall GAS and the object file
634   dependent tables?  */
635const pseudo_typeS md_pseudo_table[] =
636{
637  /* align pseudo-ops on the PA specify the actual alignment requested,
638     not the log2 of the requested alignment.  */
639#ifdef OBJ_SOM
640  {"align", pa_align, 8},
641#endif
642#ifdef OBJ_ELF
643  {"align", s_align_bytes, 8},
644#endif
645  {"begin_brtab", pa_brtab, 1},
646  {"begin_try", pa_try, 1},
647  {"block", pa_block, 1},
648  {"blockz", pa_block, 0},
649  {"byte", pa_cons, 1},
650  {"call", pa_call, 0},
651  {"callinfo", pa_callinfo, 0},
652#if defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD))
653  {"code", obj_elf_text, 0},
654#else
655  {"code", pa_text, 0},
656  {"comm", pa_comm, 0},
657#endif
658#ifdef OBJ_SOM
659  {"compiler", pa_compiler, 0},
660#endif
661  {"copyright", pa_copyright, 0},
662#if !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD)))
663  {"data", pa_data, 0},
664#endif
665  {"double", pa_float_cons, 'd'},
666  {"dword", pa_cons, 8},
667  {"end", pa_end, 0},
668  {"end_brtab", pa_brtab, 0},
669#if !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD)))
670  {"end_try", pa_try, 0},
671#endif
672  {"enter", pa_enter, 0},
673  {"entry", pa_entry, 0},
674  {"equ", pa_equ, 0},
675  {"exit", pa_exit, 0},
676  {"export", pa_export, 0},
677  {"fill", pa_fill, 0},
678  {"float", pa_float_cons, 'f'},
679  {"half", pa_cons, 2},
680  {"import", pa_import, 0},
681  {"int", pa_cons, 4},
682  {"label", pa_label, 0},
683  {"lcomm", pa_lcomm, 0},
684  {"leave", pa_leave, 0},
685  {"level", pa_level, 0},
686  {"long", pa_cons, 4},
687  {"lsym", pa_lsym, 0},
688#ifdef OBJ_SOM
689  {"nsubspa", pa_subspace, 1},
690#endif
691  {"octa", pa_cons, 16},
692  {"org", pa_origin, 0},
693  {"origin", pa_origin, 0},
694  {"param", pa_param, 0},
695  {"proc", pa_proc, 0},
696  {"procend", pa_procend, 0},
697  {"quad", pa_cons, 8},
698  {"reg", pa_equ, 1},
699  {"short", pa_cons, 2},
700  {"single", pa_float_cons, 'f'},
701#ifdef OBJ_SOM
702  {"space", pa_space, 0},
703  {"spnum", pa_spnum, 0},
704#endif
705  {"string", pa_stringer, 0},
706  {"stringz", pa_stringer, 1},
707#ifdef OBJ_SOM
708  {"subspa", pa_subspace, 0},
709#endif
710#if !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD)))
711  {"text", pa_text, 0},
712#endif
713  {"version", pa_version, 0},
714#ifdef OBJ_ELF
715  {"vtable_entry", pa_vtable_entry, 0},
716  {"vtable_inherit", pa_vtable_inherit, 0},
717#endif
718  {"word", pa_cons, 4},
719  {NULL, 0, 0}
720};
721
722/* This array holds the chars that only start a comment at the beginning of
723   a line.  If the line seems to have the form '# 123 filename'
724   .line and .file directives will appear in the pre-processed output.
725
726   Note that input_file.c hand checks for '#' at the beginning of the
727   first line of the input file.  This is because the compiler outputs
728   #NO_APP at the beginning of its output.
729
730   Also note that C style comments will always work.  */
731const char line_comment_chars[] = "#";
732
733/* This array holds the chars that always start a comment.  If the
734   pre-processor is disabled, these aren't very useful.  */
735const char comment_chars[] = ";";
736
737/* This array holds the characters which act as line separators.  */
738const char line_separator_chars[] = "!";
739
740/* Chars that can be used to separate mant from exp in floating point nums.  */
741const char EXP_CHARS[] = "eE";
742
743/* Chars that mean this number is a floating point constant.
744   As in 0f12.456 or 0d1.2345e12.
745
746   Be aware that MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_CHARS_FOR_FLOAT may have to be
747   changed in read.c.  Ideally it shouldn't hae to know abou it at
748   all, but nothing is ideal around here.  */
749const char FLT_CHARS[] = "rRsSfFdDxXpP";
750
751static struct pa_it the_insn;
752
753/* Points to the end of an expression just parsed by get_expression
754   and friends.  FIXME.  This shouldn't be handled with a file-global
755   variable.  */
756static char *expr_end;
757
758/* Nonzero if a .callinfo appeared within the current procedure.  */
759static int callinfo_found;
760
761/* Nonzero if the assembler is currently within a .entry/.exit pair.  */
762static int within_entry_exit;
763
764/* Nonzero if the assembler is currently within a procedure definition.  */
765static int within_procedure;
766
767/* Handle on structure which keep track of the last symbol
768   seen in each subspace.  */
769static label_symbol_struct *label_symbols_rootp = NULL;
770
771/* Holds the last field selector.  */
772static int hppa_field_selector;
773
774/* Nonzero when strict matching is enabled.  Zero otherwise.
775
776   Each opcode in the table has a flag which indicates whether or
777   not strict matching should be enabled for that instruction.
778
779   Mainly, strict causes errors to be ignored when a match failure
780   occurs.  However, it also affects the parsing of register fields
781   by pa_parse_number.  */
782static int strict;
783
784/* pa_parse_number returns values in `pa_number'.  Mostly
785   pa_parse_number is used to return a register number, with floating
786   point registers being numbered from FP_REG_BASE upwards.
787   The bit specified with FP_REG_RSEL is set if the floating point
788   register has a `r' suffix.  */
789#define FP_REG_BASE 64
790#define FP_REG_RSEL 128
791static int pa_number;
792
793#ifdef OBJ_SOM
794/* A dummy bfd symbol so that all relocations have symbols of some kind.  */
795static symbolS *dummy_symbol;
796#endif
797
798/* Nonzero if errors are to be printed.  */
799static int print_errors = 1;
800
801/* List of registers that are pre-defined:
802
803   Each general register has one predefined name of the form
804   %r<REGNUM> which has the value <REGNUM>.
805
806   Space and control registers are handled in a similar manner,
807   but use %sr<REGNUM> and %cr<REGNUM> as their predefined names.
808
809   Likewise for the floating point registers, but of the form
810   %fr<REGNUM>.  Floating point registers have additional predefined
811   names with 'L' and 'R' suffixes (e.g. %fr19L, %fr19R) which
812   again have the value <REGNUM>.
813
814   Many registers also have synonyms:
815
816   %r26 - %r23 have %arg0 - %arg3 as synonyms
817   %r28 - %r29 have %ret0 - %ret1 as synonyms
818   %fr4 - %fr7 have %farg0 - %farg3 as synonyms
819   %r30 has %sp as a synonym
820   %r27 has %dp as a synonym
821   %r2  has %rp as a synonym
822
823   Almost every control register has a synonym; they are not listed
824   here for brevity.
825
826   The table is sorted. Suitable for searching by a binary search.  */
827
828static const struct pd_reg pre_defined_registers[] =
829{
830  {"%arg0",  26},
831  {"%arg1",  25},
832  {"%arg2",  24},
833  {"%arg3",  23},
834  {"%cr0",    0},
835  {"%cr10",  10},
836  {"%cr11",  11},
837  {"%cr12",  12},
838  {"%cr13",  13},
839  {"%cr14",  14},
840  {"%cr15",  15},
841  {"%cr16",  16},
842  {"%cr17",  17},
843  {"%cr18",  18},
844  {"%cr19",  19},
845  {"%cr20",  20},
846  {"%cr21",  21},
847  {"%cr22",  22},
848  {"%cr23",  23},
849  {"%cr24",  24},
850  {"%cr25",  25},
851  {"%cr26",  26},
852  {"%cr27",  27},
853  {"%cr28",  28},
854  {"%cr29",  29},
855  {"%cr30",  30},
856  {"%cr31",  31},
857  {"%cr8",    8},
858  {"%cr9",    9},
859  {"%dp",    27},
860  {"%eiem",  15},
861  {"%eirr",  23},
862  {"%farg0",  4 + FP_REG_BASE},
863  {"%farg1",  5 + FP_REG_BASE},
864  {"%farg2",  6 + FP_REG_BASE},
865  {"%farg3",  7 + FP_REG_BASE},
866  {"%fr0",    0 + FP_REG_BASE},
867  {"%fr0l",   0 + FP_REG_BASE},
868  {"%fr0r",   0 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
869  {"%fr1",    1 + FP_REG_BASE},
870  {"%fr10",  10 + FP_REG_BASE},
871  {"%fr10l", 10 + FP_REG_BASE},
872  {"%fr10r", 10 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
873  {"%fr11",  11 + FP_REG_BASE},
874  {"%fr11l", 11 + FP_REG_BASE},
875  {"%fr11r", 11 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
876  {"%fr12",  12 + FP_REG_BASE},
877  {"%fr12l", 12 + FP_REG_BASE},
878  {"%fr12r", 12 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
879  {"%fr13",  13 + FP_REG_BASE},
880  {"%fr13l", 13 + FP_REG_BASE},
881  {"%fr13r", 13 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
882  {"%fr14",  14 + FP_REG_BASE},
883  {"%fr14l", 14 + FP_REG_BASE},
884  {"%fr14r", 14 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
885  {"%fr15",  15 + FP_REG_BASE},
886  {"%fr15l", 15 + FP_REG_BASE},
887  {"%fr15r", 15 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
888  {"%fr16",  16 + FP_REG_BASE},
889  {"%fr16l", 16 + FP_REG_BASE},
890  {"%fr16r", 16 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
891  {"%fr17",  17 + FP_REG_BASE},
892  {"%fr17l", 17 + FP_REG_BASE},
893  {"%fr17r", 17 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
894  {"%fr18",  18 + FP_REG_BASE},
895  {"%fr18l", 18 + FP_REG_BASE},
896  {"%fr18r", 18 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
897  {"%fr19",  19 + FP_REG_BASE},
898  {"%fr19l", 19 + FP_REG_BASE},
899  {"%fr19r", 19 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
900  {"%fr1l",   1 + FP_REG_BASE},
901  {"%fr1r",   1 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
902  {"%fr2",    2 + FP_REG_BASE},
903  {"%fr20",  20 + FP_REG_BASE},
904  {"%fr20l", 20 + FP_REG_BASE},
905  {"%fr20r", 20 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
906  {"%fr21",  21 + FP_REG_BASE},
907  {"%fr21l", 21 + FP_REG_BASE},
908  {"%fr21r", 21 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
909  {"%fr22",  22 + FP_REG_BASE},
910  {"%fr22l", 22 + FP_REG_BASE},
911  {"%fr22r", 22 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
912  {"%fr23",  23 + FP_REG_BASE},
913  {"%fr23l", 23 + FP_REG_BASE},
914  {"%fr23r", 23 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
915  {"%fr24",  24 + FP_REG_BASE},
916  {"%fr24l", 24 + FP_REG_BASE},
917  {"%fr24r", 24 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
918  {"%fr25",  25 + FP_REG_BASE},
919  {"%fr25l", 25 + FP_REG_BASE},
920  {"%fr25r", 25 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
921  {"%fr26",  26 + FP_REG_BASE},
922  {"%fr26l", 26 + FP_REG_BASE},
923  {"%fr26r", 26 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
924  {"%fr27",  27 + FP_REG_BASE},
925  {"%fr27l", 27 + FP_REG_BASE},
926  {"%fr27r", 27 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
927  {"%fr28",  28 + FP_REG_BASE},
928  {"%fr28l", 28 + FP_REG_BASE},
929  {"%fr28r", 28 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
930  {"%fr29",  29 + FP_REG_BASE},
931  {"%fr29l", 29 + FP_REG_BASE},
932  {"%fr29r", 29 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
933  {"%fr2l",   2 + FP_REG_BASE},
934  {"%fr2r",   2 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
935  {"%fr3",    3 + FP_REG_BASE},
936  {"%fr30",  30 + FP_REG_BASE},
937  {"%fr30l", 30 + FP_REG_BASE},
938  {"%fr30r", 30 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
939  {"%fr31",  31 + FP_REG_BASE},
940  {"%fr31l", 31 + FP_REG_BASE},
941  {"%fr31r", 31 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
942  {"%fr3l",   3 + FP_REG_BASE},
943  {"%fr3r",   3 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
944  {"%fr4",    4 + FP_REG_BASE},
945  {"%fr4l",   4 + FP_REG_BASE},
946  {"%fr4r",   4 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
947  {"%fr5",    5 + FP_REG_BASE},
948  {"%fr5l",   5 + FP_REG_BASE},
949  {"%fr5r",   5 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
950  {"%fr6",    6 + FP_REG_BASE},
951  {"%fr6l",   6 + FP_REG_BASE},
952  {"%fr6r",   6 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
953  {"%fr7",    7 + FP_REG_BASE},
954  {"%fr7l",   7 + FP_REG_BASE},
955  {"%fr7r",   7 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
956  {"%fr8",    8 + FP_REG_BASE},
957  {"%fr8l",   8 + FP_REG_BASE},
958  {"%fr8r",   8 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
959  {"%fr9",    9 + FP_REG_BASE},
960  {"%fr9l",   9 + FP_REG_BASE},
961  {"%fr9r",   9 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
962  {"%fret",   4},
963  {"%hta",   25},
964  {"%iir",   19},
965  {"%ior",   21},
966  {"%ipsw",  22},
967  {"%isr",   20},
968  {"%itmr",  16},
969  {"%iva",   14},
970#if TARGET_ARCH_SIZE == 64
971  {"%mrp",    2},
972#else
973  {"%mrp",   31},
974#endif
975  {"%pcoq",  18},
976  {"%pcsq",  17},
977  {"%pidr1",  8},
978  {"%pidr2",  9},
979  {"%pidr3", 12},
980  {"%pidr4", 13},
981  {"%ppda",  24},
982  {"%r0",     0},
983  {"%r1",     1},
984  {"%r10",   10},
985  {"%r11",   11},
986  {"%r12",   12},
987  {"%r13",   13},
988  {"%r14",   14},
989  {"%r15",   15},
990  {"%r16",   16},
991  {"%r17",   17},
992  {"%r18",   18},
993  {"%r19",   19},
994  {"%r2",     2},
995  {"%r20",   20},
996  {"%r21",   21},
997  {"%r22",   22},
998  {"%r23",   23},
999  {"%r24",   24},
1000  {"%r25",   25},
1001  {"%r26",   26},
1002  {"%r27",   27},
1003  {"%r28",   28},
1004  {"%r29",   29},
1005  {"%r3",     3},
1006  {"%r30",   30},
1007  {"%r31",   31},
1008  {"%r4",     4},
1009  {"%r5",     5},
1010  {"%r6",     6},
1011  {"%r7",     7},
1012  {"%r8",     8},
1013  {"%r9",     9},
1014  {"%rctr",   0},
1015  {"%ret0",  28},
1016  {"%ret1",  29},
1017  {"%rp",     2},
1018  {"%sar",   11},
1019  {"%sp",    30},
1020  {"%sr0",    0},
1021  {"%sr1",    1},
1022  {"%sr2",    2},
1023  {"%sr3",    3},
1024  {"%sr4",    4},
1025  {"%sr5",    5},
1026  {"%sr6",    6},
1027  {"%sr7",    7},
1028  {"%t1",    22},
1029  {"%t2",    21},
1030  {"%t3",    20},
1031  {"%t4",    19},
1032  {"%tf1",   11},
1033  {"%tf2",   10},
1034  {"%tf3",    9},
1035  {"%tf4",    8},
1036  {"%tr0",   24},
1037  {"%tr1",   25},
1038  {"%tr2",   26},
1039  {"%tr3",   27},
1040  {"%tr4",   28},
1041  {"%tr5",   29},
1042  {"%tr6",   30},
1043  {"%tr7",   31}
1044};
1045
1046/* This table is sorted by order of the length of the string. This is
1047   so we check for <> before we check for <. If we had a <> and checked
1048   for < first, we would get a false match.  */
1049static const struct fp_cond_map fp_cond_map[] =
1050{
1051  {"false?", 0},
1052  {"false", 1},
1053  {"true?", 30},
1054  {"true", 31},
1055  {"!<=>", 3},
1056  {"!?>=", 8},
1057  {"!?<=", 16},
1058  {"!<>", 7},
1059  {"!>=", 11},
1060  {"!?>", 12},
1061  {"?<=", 14},
1062  {"!<=", 19},
1063  {"!?<", 20},
1064  {"?>=", 22},
1065  {"!?=", 24},
1066  {"!=t", 27},
1067  {"<=>", 29},
1068  {"=t", 5},
1069  {"?=", 6},
1070  {"?<", 10},
1071  {"<=", 13},
1072  {"!>", 15},
1073  {"?>", 18},
1074  {">=", 21},
1075  {"!<", 23},
1076  {"<>", 25},
1077  {"!=", 26},
1078  {"!?", 28},
1079  {"?", 2},
1080  {"=", 4},
1081  {"<", 9},
1082  {">", 17}
1083};
1084
1085static const struct selector_entry selector_table[] =
1086{
1087  {"f", e_fsel},
1088  {"l", e_lsel},
1089  {"ld", e_ldsel},
1090  {"lp", e_lpsel},
1091  {"lr", e_lrsel},
1092  {"ls", e_lssel},
1093  {"lt", e_ltsel},
1094  {"ltp", e_ltpsel},
1095  {"n", e_nsel},
1096  {"nl", e_nlsel},
1097  {"nlr", e_nlrsel},
1098  {"p", e_psel},
1099  {"r", e_rsel},
1100  {"rd", e_rdsel},
1101  {"rp", e_rpsel},
1102  {"rr", e_rrsel},
1103  {"rs", e_rssel},
1104  {"rt", e_rtsel},
1105  {"rtp", e_rtpsel},
1106  {"t", e_tsel},
1107};
1108
1109#ifdef OBJ_SOM
1110/* default space and subspace dictionaries */
1111
1112#define GDB_SYMBOLS          GDB_SYMBOLS_SUBSPACE_NAME
1113#define GDB_STRINGS          GDB_STRINGS_SUBSPACE_NAME
1114
1115/* pre-defined subsegments (subspaces) for the HPPA.  */
1116#define SUBSEG_CODE   0
1117#define SUBSEG_LIT    1
1118#define SUBSEG_MILLI  2
1119#define SUBSEG_DATA   0
1120#define SUBSEG_BSS    2
1121#define SUBSEG_UNWIND 3
1122#define SUBSEG_GDB_STRINGS 0
1123#define SUBSEG_GDB_SYMBOLS 1
1124
1125static struct default_subspace_dict pa_def_subspaces[] =
1126{
1127  {"$CODE$", 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 24, 0x2c, 0, 8, 0, 0, SUBSEG_CODE},
1128  {"$DATA$", 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 24, 0x1f, 1, 8, 1, 1, SUBSEG_DATA},
1129  {"$LIT$", 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 16, 0x2c, 0, 8, 0, 0, SUBSEG_LIT},
1130  {"$MILLICODE$", 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 8, 0x2c, 0, 8, 0, 0, SUBSEG_MILLI},
1131  {"$BSS$", 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 80, 0x1f, 1, 8, 1, 1, SUBSEG_BSS},
1132  {NULL, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 255, 0x1f, 0, 4, 0, 0, 0}
1133};
1134
1135static struct default_space_dict pa_def_spaces[] =
1136{
1137  {"$TEXT$", 0, 1, 1, 0, 8, ASEC_NULL},
1138  {"$PRIVATE$", 1, 1, 1, 1, 16, ASEC_NULL},
1139  {NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, ASEC_NULL}
1140};
1141
1142/* Misc local definitions used by the assembler.  */
1143
1144/* These macros are used to maintain spaces/subspaces.  */
1145#define SPACE_DEFINED(space_chain)	(space_chain)->sd_defined
1146#define SPACE_USER_DEFINED(space_chain) (space_chain)->sd_user_defined
1147#define SPACE_SPNUM(space_chain)	(space_chain)->sd_spnum
1148#define SPACE_NAME(space_chain)		(space_chain)->sd_name
1149
1150#define SUBSPACE_DEFINED(ss_chain)	(ss_chain)->ssd_defined
1151#define SUBSPACE_NAME(ss_chain)		(ss_chain)->ssd_name
1152#endif
1153
1154/* Return nonzero if the string pointed to by S potentially represents
1155   a right or left half of a FP register  */
1156#define IS_R_SELECT(S)   (*(S) == 'R' || *(S) == 'r')
1157#define IS_L_SELECT(S)   (*(S) == 'L' || *(S) == 'l')
1158
1159/* Insert FIELD into OPCODE starting at bit START.  Continue pa_ip
1160   main loop after insertion.  */
1161
1162#define INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE(OPCODE, FIELD, START) \
1163  { \
1164    ((OPCODE) |= (FIELD) << (START)); \
1165    continue; \
1166  }
1167
1168/* Simple range checking for FIELD against HIGH and LOW bounds.
1169   IGNORE is used to suppress the error message.  */
1170
1171#define CHECK_FIELD(FIELD, HIGH, LOW, IGNORE) \
1172  { \
1173    if ((FIELD) > (HIGH) || (FIELD) < (LOW)) \
1174      { \
1175	if (! IGNORE) \
1176          as_bad (_("Field out of range [%d..%d] (%d)."), (LOW), (HIGH), \
1177		  (int) (FIELD));\
1178        break; \
1179      } \
1180  }
1181
1182/* Variant of CHECK_FIELD for use in md_apply_fix and other places where
1183   the current file and line number are not valid.  */
1184
1185#define CHECK_FIELD_WHERE(FIELD, HIGH, LOW, FILENAME, LINE) \
1186  { \
1187    if ((FIELD) > (HIGH) || (FIELD) < (LOW)) \
1188      { \
1189        as_bad_where ((FILENAME), (LINE), \
1190		      _("Field out of range [%d..%d] (%d)."), (LOW), (HIGH), \
1191		      (int) (FIELD));\
1192        break; \
1193      } \
1194  }
1195
1196/* Simple alignment checking for FIELD against ALIGN (a power of two).
1197   IGNORE is used to suppress the error message.  */
1198
1199#define CHECK_ALIGN(FIELD, ALIGN, IGNORE) \
1200  { \
1201    if ((FIELD) & ((ALIGN) - 1)) \
1202      { \
1203	if (! IGNORE) \
1204          as_bad (_("Field not properly aligned [%d] (%d)."), (ALIGN), \
1205		  (int) (FIELD));\
1206        break; \
1207      } \
1208  }
1209
1210#define is_DP_relative(exp)			\
1211  ((exp).X_op == O_subtract			\
1212   && strcmp (S_GET_NAME ((exp).X_op_symbol), "$global$") == 0)
1213
1214#define is_PC_relative(exp)			\
1215  ((exp).X_op == O_subtract			\
1216   && strcmp (S_GET_NAME ((exp).X_op_symbol), "$PIC_pcrel$0") == 0)
1217
1218/* We need some complex handling for stabs (sym1 - sym2).  Luckily, we'll
1219   always be able to reduce the expression to a constant, so we don't
1220   need real complex handling yet.  */
1221#define is_complex(exp)				\
1222  ((exp).X_op != O_constant && (exp).X_op != O_symbol)
1223
1224/* Actual functions to implement the PA specific code for the assembler.  */
1225
1226/* Called before writing the object file.  Make sure entry/exit and
1227   proc/procend pairs match.  */
1228
1229void
1230pa_check_eof ()
1231{
1232  if (within_entry_exit)
1233    as_fatal (_("Missing .exit\n"));
1234
1235  if (within_procedure)
1236    as_fatal (_("Missing .procend\n"));
1237}
1238
1239/* Returns a pointer to the label_symbol_struct for the current space.
1240   or NULL if no label_symbol_struct exists for the current space.  */
1241
1242static label_symbol_struct *
1243pa_get_label ()
1244{
1245  label_symbol_struct *label_chain;
1246
1247  for (label_chain = label_symbols_rootp;
1248       label_chain;
1249       label_chain = label_chain->lss_next)
1250    {
1251#ifdef OBJ_SOM
1252    if (current_space == label_chain->lss_space && label_chain->lss_label)
1253      return label_chain;
1254#endif
1255#ifdef OBJ_ELF
1256    if (now_seg == label_chain->lss_segment && label_chain->lss_label)
1257      return label_chain;
1258#endif
1259    }
1260
1261  return NULL;
1262}
1263
1264/* Defines a label for the current space.  If one is already defined,
1265   this function will replace it with the new label.  */
1266
1267void
1268pa_define_label (symbol)
1269     symbolS *symbol;
1270{
1271  label_symbol_struct *label_chain = pa_get_label ();
1272
1273  if (label_chain)
1274    label_chain->lss_label = symbol;
1275  else
1276    {
1277      /* Create a new label entry and add it to the head of the chain.  */
1278      label_chain
1279	= (label_symbol_struct *) xmalloc (sizeof (label_symbol_struct));
1280      label_chain->lss_label = symbol;
1281#ifdef OBJ_SOM
1282      label_chain->lss_space = current_space;
1283#endif
1284#ifdef OBJ_ELF
1285      label_chain->lss_segment = now_seg;
1286#endif
1287      label_chain->lss_next = NULL;
1288
1289      if (label_symbols_rootp)
1290	label_chain->lss_next = label_symbols_rootp;
1291
1292      label_symbols_rootp = label_chain;
1293    }
1294
1295#ifdef OBJ_ELF
1296  dwarf2_emit_label (symbol);
1297#endif
1298}
1299
1300/* Removes a label definition for the current space.
1301   If there is no label_symbol_struct entry, then no action is taken.  */
1302
1303static void
1304pa_undefine_label ()
1305{
1306  label_symbol_struct *label_chain;
1307  label_symbol_struct *prev_label_chain = NULL;
1308
1309  for (label_chain = label_symbols_rootp;
1310       label_chain;
1311       label_chain = label_chain->lss_next)
1312    {
1313      if (1
1314#ifdef OBJ_SOM
1315	  && current_space == label_chain->lss_space && label_chain->lss_label
1316#endif
1317#ifdef OBJ_ELF
1318	  && now_seg == label_chain->lss_segment && label_chain->lss_label
1319#endif
1320	  )
1321	{
1322	  /* Remove the label from the chain and free its memory.  */
1323	  if (prev_label_chain)
1324	    prev_label_chain->lss_next = label_chain->lss_next;
1325	  else
1326	    label_symbols_rootp = label_chain->lss_next;
1327
1328	  free (label_chain);
1329	  break;
1330	}
1331      prev_label_chain = label_chain;
1332    }
1333}
1334
1335/* An HPPA-specific version of fix_new.  This is required because the HPPA
1336   code needs to keep track of some extra stuff.  Each call to fix_new_hppa
1337   results in the creation of an instance of an hppa_fix_struct.  An
1338   hppa_fix_struct stores the extra information along with a pointer to the
1339   original fixS.  This is attached to the original fixup via the
1340   tc_fix_data field.  */
1341
1342static void
1343fix_new_hppa (frag, where, size, add_symbol, offset, exp, pcrel,
1344	      r_type, r_field, r_format, arg_reloc, unwind_bits)
1345     fragS *frag;
1346     int where;
1347     int size;
1348     symbolS *add_symbol;
1349     offsetT offset;
1350     expressionS *exp;
1351     int pcrel;
1352     bfd_reloc_code_real_type r_type;
1353     enum hppa_reloc_field_selector_type_alt r_field;
1354     int r_format;
1355     unsigned int arg_reloc;
1356     int unwind_bits ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1357{
1358  fixS *new_fix;
1359
1360  struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fix = (struct hppa_fix_struct *)
1361  obstack_alloc (&notes, sizeof (struct hppa_fix_struct));
1362
1363  if (exp != NULL)
1364    new_fix = fix_new_exp (frag, where, size, exp, pcrel, r_type);
1365  else
1366    new_fix = fix_new (frag, where, size, add_symbol, offset, pcrel, r_type);
1367  new_fix->tc_fix_data = (void *) hppa_fix;
1368  hppa_fix->fx_r_type = r_type;
1369  hppa_fix->fx_r_field = r_field;
1370  hppa_fix->fx_r_format = r_format;
1371  hppa_fix->fx_arg_reloc = arg_reloc;
1372  hppa_fix->segment = now_seg;
1373#ifdef OBJ_SOM
1374  if (r_type == R_ENTRY || r_type == R_EXIT)
1375    new_fix->fx_offset = unwind_bits;
1376#endif
1377
1378  /* foo-$global$ is used to access non-automatic storage.  $global$
1379     is really just a marker and has served its purpose, so eliminate
1380     it now so as not to confuse write.c.  Ditto for $PIC_pcrel$0.  */
1381  if (new_fix->fx_subsy
1382      && (strcmp (S_GET_NAME (new_fix->fx_subsy), "$global$") == 0
1383	  || strcmp (S_GET_NAME (new_fix->fx_subsy), "$PIC_pcrel$0") == 0))
1384    new_fix->fx_subsy = NULL;
1385}
1386
1387/* Parse a .byte, .word, .long expression for the HPPA.  Called by
1388   cons via the TC_PARSE_CONS_EXPRESSION macro.  */
1389
1390void
1391parse_cons_expression_hppa (exp)
1392     expressionS *exp;
1393{
1394  hppa_field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&input_line_pointer);
1395  expression (exp);
1396}
1397
1398/* This fix_new is called by cons via TC_CONS_FIX_NEW.
1399   hppa_field_selector is set by the parse_cons_expression_hppa.  */
1400
1401void
1402cons_fix_new_hppa (frag, where, size, exp)
1403     fragS *frag;
1404     int where;
1405     int size;
1406     expressionS *exp;
1407{
1408  unsigned int rel_type;
1409
1410  /* Get a base relocation type.  */
1411  if (is_DP_relative (*exp))
1412    rel_type = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
1413  else if (is_PC_relative (*exp))
1414    rel_type = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
1415  else if (is_complex (*exp))
1416    rel_type = R_HPPA_COMPLEX;
1417  else
1418    rel_type = R_HPPA;
1419
1420  if (hppa_field_selector != e_psel && hppa_field_selector != e_fsel)
1421    {
1422      as_warn (_("Invalid field selector.  Assuming F%%."));
1423      hppa_field_selector = e_fsel;
1424    }
1425
1426  fix_new_hppa (frag, where, size,
1427		(symbolS *) NULL, (offsetT) 0, exp, 0, rel_type,
1428		hppa_field_selector, size * 8, 0, 0);
1429
1430  /* Reset field selector to its default state.  */
1431  hppa_field_selector = 0;
1432}
1433
1434/* This function is called once, at assembler startup time.  It should
1435   set up all the tables, etc. that the MD part of the assembler will need.  */
1436
1437void
1438md_begin ()
1439{
1440  const char *retval = NULL;
1441  int lose = 0;
1442  unsigned int i = 0;
1443
1444  last_call_info = NULL;
1445  call_info_root = NULL;
1446
1447  /* Set the default machine type.  */
1448  if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, DEFAULT_LEVEL))
1449    as_warn (_("could not set architecture and machine"));
1450
1451  /* Folding of text and data segments fails miserably on the PA.
1452     Warn user and disable "-R" option.  */
1453  if (flag_readonly_data_in_text)
1454    {
1455      as_warn (_("-R option not supported on this target."));
1456      flag_readonly_data_in_text = 0;
1457    }
1458
1459#ifdef OBJ_SOM
1460  pa_spaces_begin ();
1461#endif
1462
1463  op_hash = hash_new ();
1464
1465  while (i < NUMOPCODES)
1466    {
1467      const char *name = pa_opcodes[i].name;
1468      retval = hash_insert (op_hash, name, (struct pa_opcode *) &pa_opcodes[i]);
1469      if (retval != NULL && *retval != '\0')
1470	{
1471	  as_fatal (_("Internal error: can't hash `%s': %s\n"), name, retval);
1472	  lose = 1;
1473	}
1474      do
1475	{
1476	  if ((pa_opcodes[i].match & pa_opcodes[i].mask)
1477	      != pa_opcodes[i].match)
1478	    {
1479	      fprintf (stderr, _("internal error: losing opcode: `%s' \"%s\"\n"),
1480		       pa_opcodes[i].name, pa_opcodes[i].args);
1481	      lose = 1;
1482	    }
1483	  ++i;
1484	}
1485      while (i < NUMOPCODES && !strcmp (pa_opcodes[i].name, name));
1486    }
1487
1488  if (lose)
1489    as_fatal (_("Broken assembler.  No assembly attempted."));
1490
1491#ifdef OBJ_SOM
1492  /* SOM will change text_section.  To make sure we never put
1493     anything into the old one switch to the new one now.  */
1494  subseg_set (text_section, 0);
1495#endif
1496
1497#ifdef OBJ_SOM
1498  dummy_symbol = symbol_find_or_make ("L$dummy");
1499  S_SET_SEGMENT (dummy_symbol, text_section);
1500  /* Force the symbol to be converted to a real symbol.  */
1501  (void) symbol_get_bfdsym (dummy_symbol);
1502#endif
1503}
1504
1505/* Assemble a single instruction storing it into a frag.  */
1506void
1507md_assemble (str)
1508     char *str;
1509{
1510  char *to;
1511
1512  /* The had better be something to assemble.  */
1513  assert (str);
1514
1515  /* If we are within a procedure definition, make sure we've
1516     defined a label for the procedure; handle case where the
1517     label was defined after the .PROC directive.
1518
1519     Note there's not need to diddle with the segment or fragment
1520     for the label symbol in this case.  We have already switched
1521     into the new $CODE$ subspace at this point.  */
1522  if (within_procedure && last_call_info->start_symbol == NULL)
1523    {
1524      label_symbol_struct *label_symbol = pa_get_label ();
1525
1526      if (label_symbol)
1527	{
1528	  if (label_symbol->lss_label)
1529	    {
1530	      last_call_info->start_symbol = label_symbol->lss_label;
1531	      symbol_get_bfdsym (label_symbol->lss_label)->flags
1532		|= BSF_FUNCTION;
1533#ifdef OBJ_SOM
1534	      /* Also handle allocation of a fixup to hold the unwind
1535		 information when the label appears after the proc/procend.  */
1536	      if (within_entry_exit)
1537		{
1538		  char *where;
1539		  unsigned int u;
1540
1541		  where = frag_more (0);
1542		  u = UNWIND_LOW32 (&last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor);
1543		  fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
1544				NULL, (offsetT) 0, NULL,
1545				0, R_HPPA_ENTRY, e_fsel, 0, 0, u);
1546		}
1547#endif
1548	    }
1549	  else
1550	    as_bad (_("Missing function name for .PROC (corrupted label chain)"));
1551	}
1552      else
1553	as_bad (_("Missing function name for .PROC"));
1554    }
1555
1556  /* Assemble the instruction.  Results are saved into "the_insn".  */
1557  pa_ip (str);
1558
1559  /* Get somewhere to put the assembled instruction.  */
1560  to = frag_more (4);
1561
1562  /* Output the opcode.  */
1563  md_number_to_chars (to, the_insn.opcode, 4);
1564
1565  /* If necessary output more stuff.  */
1566  if (the_insn.reloc != R_HPPA_NONE)
1567    fix_new_hppa (frag_now, (to - frag_now->fr_literal), 4, NULL,
1568		  (offsetT) 0, &the_insn.exp, the_insn.pcrel,
1569		  the_insn.reloc, the_insn.field_selector,
1570		  the_insn.format, the_insn.arg_reloc, 0);
1571
1572#ifdef OBJ_ELF
1573  dwarf2_emit_insn (4);
1574#endif
1575}
1576
1577/* Do the real work for assembling a single instruction.  Store results
1578   into the global "the_insn" variable.  */
1579
1580static void
1581pa_ip (str)
1582     char *str;
1583{
1584  char *error_message = "";
1585  char *s, c, *argstart, *name, *save_s;
1586  const char *args;
1587  int match = FALSE;
1588  int comma = 0;
1589  int cmpltr, nullif, flag, cond, num;
1590  unsigned long opcode;
1591  struct pa_opcode *insn;
1592
1593#ifdef OBJ_SOM
1594  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
1595  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
1596#endif
1597
1598  /* Convert everything up to the first whitespace character into lower
1599     case.  */
1600  for (s = str; *s != ' ' && *s != '\t' && *s != '\n' && *s != '\0'; s++)
1601    *s = TOLOWER (*s);
1602
1603  /* Skip to something interesting.  */
1604  for (s = str;
1605       ISUPPER (*s) || ISLOWER (*s) || (*s >= '0' && *s <= '3');
1606       ++s)
1607    ;
1608
1609  switch (*s)
1610    {
1611
1612    case '\0':
1613      break;
1614
1615    case ',':
1616      comma = 1;
1617
1618      /*FALLTHROUGH */
1619
1620    case ' ':
1621      *s++ = '\0';
1622      break;
1623
1624    default:
1625      as_bad (_("Unknown opcode: `%s'"), str);
1626      return;
1627    }
1628
1629  /* Look up the opcode in the has table.  */
1630  if ((insn = (struct pa_opcode *) hash_find (op_hash, str)) == NULL)
1631    {
1632      as_bad ("Unknown opcode: `%s'", str);
1633      return;
1634    }
1635
1636  if (comma)
1637    {
1638      *--s = ',';
1639    }
1640
1641  /* Mark the location where arguments for the instruction start, then
1642     start processing them.  */
1643  argstart = s;
1644  for (;;)
1645    {
1646      /* Do some initialization.  */
1647      opcode = insn->match;
1648      strict = (insn->flags & FLAG_STRICT);
1649      memset (&the_insn, 0, sizeof (the_insn));
1650
1651      the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_NONE;
1652
1653      if (insn->arch >= pa20
1654	  && bfd_get_mach (stdoutput) < insn->arch)
1655	goto failed;
1656
1657      /* Build the opcode, checking as we go to make
1658         sure that the operands match.  */
1659      for (args = insn->args;; ++args)
1660	{
1661	  /* Absorb white space in instruction.  */
1662	  while (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t')
1663	    s++;
1664
1665	  switch (*args)
1666	    {
1667
1668	    /* End of arguments.  */
1669	    case '\0':
1670	      if (*s == '\0')
1671		match = TRUE;
1672	      break;
1673
1674	    case '+':
1675	      if (*s == '+')
1676		{
1677		  ++s;
1678		  continue;
1679		}
1680	      if (*s == '-')
1681		continue;
1682	      break;
1683
1684	    /* These must match exactly.  */
1685	    case '(':
1686	    case ')':
1687	    case ',':
1688	    case ' ':
1689	      if (*s++ == *args)
1690		continue;
1691	      break;
1692
1693	    /* Handle a 5 bit register or control register field at 10.  */
1694	    case 'b':
1695	    case '^':
1696	      if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
1697		break;
1698	      num = pa_number;
1699	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
1700	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 21);
1701
1702	    /* Handle %sar or %cr11.  No bits get set, we just verify that it
1703	       is there.  */
1704	    case '!':
1705	      /* Skip whitespace before register.  */
1706	      while (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t')
1707		s = s + 1;
1708
1709	      if (!strncasecmp (s, "%sar", 4))
1710	        {
1711		  s += 4;
1712		  continue;
1713		}
1714	      else if (!strncasecmp (s, "%cr11", 5))
1715	        {
1716		  s += 5;
1717		  continue;
1718		}
1719	      break;
1720
1721	    /* Handle a 5 bit register field at 15.  */
1722	    case 'x':
1723	      if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
1724		break;
1725	      num = pa_number;
1726	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
1727	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
1728
1729	    /* Handle a 5 bit register field at 31.  */
1730	    case 't':
1731	      if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
1732		break;
1733	      num = pa_number;
1734	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
1735	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
1736
1737	    /* Handle a 5 bit register field at 10 and 15.  */
1738	    case 'a':
1739	      if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
1740		break;
1741	      num = pa_number;
1742	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
1743	      opcode |= num << 16;
1744	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 21);
1745
1746	    /* Handle a 5 bit field length at 31.  */
1747	    case 'T':
1748	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
1749	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
1750		break;
1751	      s = expr_end;
1752	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 32, 1, 0);
1753	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, 32 - num, 0);
1754
1755	    /* Handle a 5 bit immediate at 15.  */
1756	    case '5':
1757	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
1758	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
1759		break;
1760	      s = expr_end;
1761	      /* When in strict mode, we want to just reject this
1762		 match instead of giving an out of range error.  */
1763	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 15, -16, strict);
1764	      num = low_sign_unext (num, 5);
1765	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
1766
1767	    /* Handle a 5 bit immediate at 31.  */
1768	    case 'V':
1769	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
1770	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
1771		break;
1772	      s = expr_end;
1773	      /* When in strict mode, we want to just reject this
1774		 match instead of giving an out of range error.  */
1775	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 15, -16, strict);
1776	      num = low_sign_unext (num, 5);
1777	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
1778
1779	    /* Handle an unsigned 5 bit immediate at 31.  */
1780	    case 'r':
1781	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
1782	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
1783		break;
1784	      s = expr_end;
1785	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, strict);
1786	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
1787
1788	    /* Handle an unsigned 5 bit immediate at 15.  */
1789	    case 'R':
1790	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
1791	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
1792		break;
1793	      s = expr_end;
1794	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, strict);
1795	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
1796
1797	    /* Handle an unsigned 10 bit immediate at 15.  */
1798	    case 'U':
1799	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
1800	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
1801		break;
1802	      s = expr_end;
1803	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 1023, 0, strict);
1804	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
1805
1806	    /* Handle a 2 bit space identifier at 17.  */
1807	    case 's':
1808	      if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
1809		break;
1810	      num = pa_number;
1811	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 3, 0, 1);
1812	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 14);
1813
1814	    /* Handle a 3 bit space identifier at 18.  */
1815	    case 'S':
1816	      if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
1817		break;
1818	      num = pa_number;
1819	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 7, 0, 1);
1820	      opcode |= re_assemble_3 (num);
1821	      continue;
1822
1823	    /* Handle all completers.  */
1824	    case 'c':
1825	      switch (*++args)
1826		{
1827
1828		/* Handle a completer for an indexing load or store.  */
1829		case 'X':
1830		case 'x':
1831		  {
1832		    int uu = 0;
1833		    int m = 0;
1834		    int i = 0;
1835		    while (*s == ',' && i < 2)
1836		      {
1837			s++;
1838			if (strncasecmp (s, "sm", 2) == 0)
1839			  {
1840			    uu = 1;
1841			    m = 1;
1842			    s++;
1843			    i++;
1844			  }
1845			else if (strncasecmp (s, "m", 1) == 0)
1846			  m = 1;
1847			else if ((strncasecmp (s, "s ", 2) == 0)
1848				 || (strncasecmp (s, "s,", 2) == 0))
1849			  uu = 1;
1850			else if (strict)
1851			  {
1852			    /* This is a match failure.  */
1853			    s--;
1854			    break;
1855			  }
1856			else
1857			  as_bad (_("Invalid Indexed Load Completer."));
1858			s++;
1859			i++;
1860		      }
1861		    if (i > 2)
1862		      as_bad (_("Invalid Indexed Load Completer Syntax."));
1863		    opcode |= m << 5;
1864		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, uu, 13);
1865		  }
1866
1867		/* Handle a short load/store completer.  */
1868		case 'M':
1869		case 'm':
1870		case 'q':
1871		case 'J':
1872		case 'e':
1873		  {
1874		    int a = 0;
1875		    int m = 0;
1876		    if (*s == ',')
1877		      {
1878			s++;
1879			if (strncasecmp (s, "ma", 2) == 0)
1880			  {
1881			    a = 0;
1882			    m = 1;
1883			    s += 2;
1884			  }
1885			else if (strncasecmp (s, "mb", 2) == 0)
1886			  {
1887			    a = 1;
1888			    m = 1;
1889			    s += 2;
1890			  }
1891			else if (strict)
1892			  /* This is a match failure.  */
1893			  s--;
1894			else
1895			  {
1896			    as_bad (_("Invalid Short Load/Store Completer."));
1897			    s += 2;
1898			  }
1899		      }
1900		    /* If we did not get a ma/mb completer, then we do not
1901		       consider this a positive match for 'ce'.  */
1902		    else if (*args == 'e')
1903		      break;
1904
1905		   /* 'J', 'm', 'M' and 'q' are the same, except for where they
1906		       encode the before/after field.  */
1907		   if (*args == 'm' || *args == 'M')
1908		      {
1909			opcode |= m << 5;
1910			INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, a, 13);
1911		      }
1912		    else if (*args == 'q')
1913		      {
1914			opcode |= m << 3;
1915			INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, a, 2);
1916		      }
1917		    else if (*args == 'J')
1918		      {
1919		        /* M bit is explicit in the major opcode.  */
1920			INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, a, 2);
1921		      }
1922		    else if (*args == 'e')
1923		      {
1924			/* Stash the ma/mb flag temporarily in the
1925			   instruction.  We will use (and remove it)
1926			   later when handling 'J', 'K', '<' & '>'.  */
1927			opcode |= a;
1928			continue;
1929		      }
1930		  }
1931
1932		/* Handle a stbys completer.  */
1933		case 'A':
1934		case 's':
1935		  {
1936		    int a = 0;
1937		    int m = 0;
1938		    int i = 0;
1939		    while (*s == ',' && i < 2)
1940		      {
1941			s++;
1942			if (strncasecmp (s, "m", 1) == 0)
1943			  m = 1;
1944			else if ((strncasecmp (s, "b ", 2) == 0)
1945				 || (strncasecmp (s, "b,", 2) == 0))
1946			  a = 0;
1947			else if (strncasecmp (s, "e", 1) == 0)
1948			  a = 1;
1949			/* In strict mode, this is a match failure.  */
1950			else if (strict)
1951			  {
1952			    s--;
1953			    break;
1954			  }
1955			else
1956			  as_bad (_("Invalid Store Bytes Short Completer"));
1957			s++;
1958			i++;
1959		      }
1960		    if (i > 2)
1961		      as_bad (_("Invalid Store Bytes Short Completer"));
1962		    opcode |= m << 5;
1963		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, a, 13);
1964		  }
1965
1966		/* Handle load cache hint completer.  */
1967		case 'c':
1968		  cmpltr = 0;
1969		  if (!strncmp (s, ",sl", 3))
1970		    {
1971		      s += 3;
1972		      cmpltr = 2;
1973		    }
1974		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 10);
1975
1976		/* Handle store cache hint completer.  */
1977		case 'C':
1978		  cmpltr = 0;
1979		  if (!strncmp (s, ",sl", 3))
1980		    {
1981		      s += 3;
1982		      cmpltr = 2;
1983		    }
1984		  else if (!strncmp (s, ",bc", 3))
1985		    {
1986		      s += 3;
1987		      cmpltr = 1;
1988		    }
1989		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 10);
1990
1991		/* Handle load and clear cache hint completer.  */
1992		case 'd':
1993		  cmpltr = 0;
1994		  if (!strncmp (s, ",co", 3))
1995		    {
1996		      s += 3;
1997		      cmpltr = 1;
1998		    }
1999		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 10);
2000
2001		/* Handle load ordering completer.  */
2002		case 'o':
2003		  if (strncmp (s, ",o", 2) != 0)
2004		    break;
2005		  s += 2;
2006		  continue;
2007
2008		/* Handle a branch gate completer.  */
2009		case 'g':
2010		  if (strncasecmp (s, ",gate", 5) != 0)
2011		    break;
2012		  s += 5;
2013		  continue;
2014
2015		/* Handle a branch link and push completer.  */
2016		case 'p':
2017		  if (strncasecmp (s, ",l,push", 7) != 0)
2018		    break;
2019		  s += 7;
2020		  continue;
2021
2022		/* Handle a branch link completer.  */
2023		case 'l':
2024		  if (strncasecmp (s, ",l", 2) != 0)
2025		    break;
2026		  s += 2;
2027		  continue;
2028
2029		/* Handle a branch pop completer.  */
2030		case 'P':
2031		  if (strncasecmp (s, ",pop", 4) != 0)
2032		    break;
2033		  s += 4;
2034		  continue;
2035
2036		/* Handle a local processor completer.  */
2037		case 'L':
2038		  if (strncasecmp (s, ",l", 2) != 0)
2039		    break;
2040		  s += 2;
2041		  continue;
2042
2043		/* Handle a PROBE read/write completer.  */
2044		case 'w':
2045		  flag = 0;
2046		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",w", 2))
2047		    {
2048		      flag = 1;
2049		      s += 2;
2050		    }
2051		  else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",r", 2))
2052		    {
2053		      flag = 0;
2054		      s += 2;
2055		    }
2056
2057		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 6);
2058
2059		/* Handle MFCTL wide completer.  */
2060		case 'W':
2061		  if (strncasecmp (s, ",w", 2) != 0)
2062		    break;
2063		  s += 2;
2064		  continue;
2065
2066		/* Handle an RFI restore completer.  */
2067		case 'r':
2068		  flag = 0;
2069		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",r", 2))
2070		    {
2071		      flag = 5;
2072		      s += 2;
2073		    }
2074
2075		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 5);
2076
2077		/* Handle a system control completer.  */
2078		case 'Z':
2079		  if (*s == ',' && (*(s + 1) == 'm' || *(s + 1) == 'M'))
2080		    {
2081		      flag = 1;
2082		      s += 2;
2083		    }
2084		  else
2085		    flag = 0;
2086
2087		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 5);
2088
2089		/* Handle intermediate/final completer for DCOR.  */
2090		case 'i':
2091		  flag = 0;
2092		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",i", 2))
2093		    {
2094		      flag = 1;
2095		      s += 2;
2096		    }
2097
2098		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 6);
2099
2100		/* Handle zero/sign extension completer.  */
2101		case 'z':
2102		  flag = 1;
2103		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",z", 2))
2104		    {
2105		      flag = 0;
2106		      s += 2;
2107		    }
2108
2109		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 10);
2110
2111		/* Handle add completer.  */
2112		case 'a':
2113		  flag = 1;
2114		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",l", 2))
2115		    {
2116		      flag = 2;
2117		      s += 2;
2118		    }
2119		  else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",tsv", 4))
2120		    {
2121		      flag = 3;
2122		      s += 4;
2123		    }
2124
2125		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 10);
2126
2127		/* Handle 64 bit carry for ADD.  */
2128		case 'Y':
2129		  flag = 0;
2130		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",dc,tsv", 7) ||
2131		      !strncasecmp (s, ",tsv,dc", 7))
2132		    {
2133		      flag = 1;
2134		      s += 7;
2135		    }
2136		  else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",dc", 3))
2137		    {
2138		      flag = 0;
2139		      s += 3;
2140		    }
2141		  else
2142		    break;
2143
2144		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
2145
2146		/* Handle 32 bit carry for ADD.  */
2147		case 'y':
2148		  flag = 0;
2149		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",c,tsv", 6) ||
2150		      !strncasecmp (s, ",tsv,c", 6))
2151		    {
2152		      flag = 1;
2153		      s += 6;
2154		    }
2155		  else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",c", 2))
2156		    {
2157		      flag = 0;
2158		      s += 2;
2159		    }
2160		  else
2161		    break;
2162
2163		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
2164
2165		/* Handle trap on signed overflow.  */
2166		case 'v':
2167		  flag = 0;
2168		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",tsv", 4))
2169		    {
2170		      flag = 1;
2171		      s += 4;
2172		    }
2173
2174		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
2175
2176		/* Handle trap on condition and overflow.  */
2177		case 't':
2178		  flag = 0;
2179		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",tc,tsv", 7) ||
2180		      !strncasecmp (s, ",tsv,tc", 7))
2181		    {
2182		      flag = 1;
2183		      s += 7;
2184		    }
2185		  else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",tc", 3))
2186		    {
2187		      flag = 0;
2188		      s += 3;
2189		    }
2190		  else
2191		    break;
2192
2193		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
2194
2195		/* Handle 64 bit borrow for SUB.  */
2196		case 'B':
2197		  flag = 0;
2198		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",db,tsv", 7) ||
2199		      !strncasecmp (s, ",tsv,db", 7))
2200		    {
2201		      flag = 1;
2202		      s += 7;
2203		    }
2204		  else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",db", 3))
2205		    {
2206		      flag = 0;
2207		      s += 3;
2208		    }
2209		  else
2210		    break;
2211
2212		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
2213
2214		/* Handle 32 bit borrow for SUB.  */
2215		case 'b':
2216		  flag = 0;
2217		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",b,tsv", 6) ||
2218		      !strncasecmp (s, ",tsv,b", 6))
2219		    {
2220		      flag = 1;
2221		      s += 6;
2222		    }
2223		  else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",b", 2))
2224		    {
2225		      flag = 0;
2226		      s += 2;
2227		    }
2228		  else
2229		    break;
2230
2231		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
2232
2233		/* Handle trap condition completer for UADDCM.  */
2234		case 'T':
2235		  flag = 0;
2236		  if (!strncasecmp (s, ",tc", 3))
2237		    {
2238		      flag = 1;
2239		      s += 3;
2240		    }
2241
2242		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 6);
2243
2244		/* Handle signed/unsigned at 21.  */
2245		case 'S':
2246		  {
2247		    int sign = 1;
2248		    if (strncasecmp (s, ",s", 2) == 0)
2249		      {
2250			sign = 1;
2251			s += 2;
2252		      }
2253		    else if (strncasecmp (s, ",u", 2) == 0)
2254		      {
2255			sign = 0;
2256			s += 2;
2257		      }
2258
2259		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, sign, 10);
2260		  }
2261
2262		/* Handle left/right combination at 17:18.  */
2263		case 'h':
2264		  if (*s++ == ',')
2265		    {
2266		      int lr = 0;
2267		      if (*s == 'r')
2268			lr = 2;
2269		      else if (*s == 'l')
2270			lr = 0;
2271		      else
2272			as_bad (_("Invalid left/right combination completer"));
2273
2274		      s++;
2275		      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, lr, 13);
2276		    }
2277		  else
2278		    as_bad (_("Invalid left/right combination completer"));
2279		  break;
2280
2281		/* Handle saturation at 24:25.  */
2282		case 'H':
2283		  {
2284		    int sat = 3;
2285		    if (strncasecmp (s, ",ss", 3) == 0)
2286		      {
2287			sat = 1;
2288			s += 3;
2289		      }
2290		    else if (strncasecmp (s, ",us", 3) == 0)
2291		      {
2292			sat = 0;
2293			s += 3;
2294		      }
2295
2296		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, sat, 6);
2297		  }
2298
2299		/* Handle permutation completer.  */
2300		case '*':
2301		  if (*s++ == ',')
2302		    {
2303		      int permloc[4];
2304		      int perm = 0;
2305		      int i = 0;
2306		      permloc[0] = 13;
2307		      permloc[1] = 10;
2308		      permloc[2] = 8;
2309		      permloc[3] = 6;
2310		      for (; i < 4; i++)
2311		        {
2312			  switch (*s++)
2313			    {
2314			    case '0':
2315			      perm = 0;
2316			      break;
2317			    case '1':
2318			      perm = 1;
2319			      break;
2320			    case '2':
2321			      perm = 2;
2322			      break;
2323			    case '3':
2324			      perm = 3;
2325			      break;
2326			    default:
2327			      as_bad (_("Invalid permutation completer"));
2328			    }
2329			  opcode |= perm << permloc[i];
2330			}
2331		      continue;
2332		    }
2333		  else
2334		    as_bad (_("Invalid permutation completer"));
2335		  break;
2336
2337		default:
2338		  abort ();
2339		}
2340	      break;
2341
2342	    /* Handle all conditions.  */
2343	    case '?':
2344	      {
2345		args++;
2346		switch (*args)
2347		  {
2348		  /* Handle FP compare conditions.  */
2349		  case 'f':
2350		    cond = pa_parse_fp_cmp_cond (&s);
2351		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cond, 0);
2352
2353		  /* Handle an add condition.  */
2354		  case 'A':
2355		  case 'a':
2356		    cmpltr = 0;
2357		    flag = 0;
2358		    if (*s == ',')
2359		      {
2360			s++;
2361
2362			/* 64 bit conditions.  */
2363			if (*args == 'A')
2364			  {
2365			    if (*s == '*')
2366			      s++;
2367			    else
2368			      break;
2369			  }
2370			else if (*s == '*')
2371			  break;
2372
2373			name = s;
2374			while (*s != ',' && *s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
2375			  s += 1;
2376			c = *s;
2377			*s = 0x00;
2378			if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
2379			  cmpltr = 1;
2380			else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
2381			  cmpltr = 2;
2382			else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
2383			  cmpltr = 3;
2384			else if (strcasecmp (name, "nuv") == 0)
2385			  cmpltr = 4;
2386			else if (strcasecmp (name, "znv") == 0)
2387			  cmpltr = 5;
2388			else if (strcasecmp (name, "sv") == 0)
2389			  cmpltr = 6;
2390			else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
2391			  cmpltr = 7;
2392			else if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
2393			  {
2394			    cmpltr = 0;
2395			    flag = 1;
2396			  }
2397			else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
2398			  {
2399			    cmpltr = 1;
2400			    flag = 1;
2401			  }
2402			else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
2403			  {
2404			    cmpltr = 2;
2405			    flag = 1;
2406			  }
2407			else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
2408			  {
2409			    cmpltr = 3;
2410			    flag = 1;
2411			  }
2412			else if (strcasecmp (name, "uv") == 0)
2413			  {
2414			    cmpltr = 4;
2415			    flag = 1;
2416			  }
2417			else if (strcasecmp (name, "vnz") == 0)
2418			  {
2419			    cmpltr = 5;
2420			    flag = 1;
2421			  }
2422			else if (strcasecmp (name, "nsv") == 0)
2423			  {
2424			    cmpltr = 6;
2425			    flag = 1;
2426			  }
2427			else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
2428			  {
2429			    cmpltr = 7;
2430			    flag = 1;
2431			  }
2432			/* ",*" is a valid condition.  */
2433			else if (*args == 'a' || *name)
2434			  as_bad (_("Invalid Add Condition: %s"), name);
2435			*s = c;
2436		      }
2437		    opcode |= cmpltr << 13;
2438		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 12);
2439
2440		  /* Handle non-negated add and branch condition.  */
2441		  case 'd':
2442		    cmpltr = pa_parse_nonneg_add_cmpltr (&s);
2443		    if (cmpltr < 0)
2444		      {
2445			as_bad (_("Invalid Add and Branch Condition"));
2446			cmpltr = 0;
2447		      }
2448		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
2449
2450		  /* Handle 64 bit wide-mode add and branch condition.  */
2451		  case 'W':
2452		    cmpltr = pa_parse_addb_64_cmpltr (&s);
2453		    if (cmpltr < 0)
2454		      {
2455			as_bad (_("Invalid Add and Branch Condition"));
2456			cmpltr = 0;
2457		      }
2458		    else
2459		      {
2460			/* Negated condition requires an opcode change.  */
2461			opcode |= (cmpltr & 8) << 24;
2462		      }
2463		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr & 7, 13);
2464
2465		  /* Handle a negated or non-negated add and branch
2466		     condition.  */
2467		  case '@':
2468		    save_s = s;
2469		    cmpltr = pa_parse_nonneg_add_cmpltr (&s);
2470		    if (cmpltr < 0)
2471		      {
2472			s = save_s;
2473			cmpltr = pa_parse_neg_add_cmpltr (&s);
2474			if (cmpltr < 0)
2475			  {
2476			    as_bad (_("Invalid Compare/Subtract Condition"));
2477			    cmpltr = 0;
2478			  }
2479			else
2480			  {
2481			    /* Negated condition requires an opcode change.  */
2482			    opcode |= 1 << 27;
2483			  }
2484		      }
2485		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
2486
2487		  /* Handle branch on bit conditions.  */
2488		  case 'B':
2489		  case 'b':
2490		    cmpltr = 0;
2491		    if (*s == ',')
2492		      {
2493			s++;
2494
2495			if (*args == 'B')
2496			  {
2497			    if (*s == '*')
2498			      s++;
2499			    else
2500			      break;
2501			  }
2502			else if (*s == '*')
2503			  break;
2504
2505			if (strncmp (s, "<", 1) == 0)
2506			  {
2507			    cmpltr = 0;
2508			    s++;
2509			  }
2510			else if (strncmp (s, ">=", 2) == 0)
2511			  {
2512			    cmpltr = 1;
2513			    s += 2;
2514			  }
2515			else
2516			  as_bad (_("Invalid Bit Branch Condition: %c"), *s);
2517		      }
2518		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 15);
2519
2520		  /* Handle a compare/subtract condition.  */
2521		  case 'S':
2522		  case 's':
2523		    cmpltr = 0;
2524		    flag = 0;
2525		    if (*s == ',')
2526		      {
2527			s++;
2528
2529			/* 64 bit conditions.  */
2530			if (*args == 'S')
2531			  {
2532			    if (*s == '*')
2533			      s++;
2534			    else
2535			      break;
2536			  }
2537			else if (*s == '*')
2538			  break;
2539
2540			name = s;
2541			while (*s != ',' && *s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
2542			  s += 1;
2543			c = *s;
2544			*s = 0x00;
2545			if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
2546			  cmpltr = 1;
2547			else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
2548			  cmpltr = 2;
2549			else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
2550			  cmpltr = 3;
2551			else if (strcasecmp (name, "<<") == 0)
2552			  cmpltr = 4;
2553			else if (strcasecmp (name, "<<=") == 0)
2554			  cmpltr = 5;
2555			else if (strcasecmp (name, "sv") == 0)
2556			  cmpltr = 6;
2557			else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
2558			  cmpltr = 7;
2559			else if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
2560			  {
2561			    cmpltr = 0;
2562			    flag = 1;
2563			  }
2564			else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
2565			  {
2566			    cmpltr = 1;
2567			    flag = 1;
2568			  }
2569			else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
2570			  {
2571			    cmpltr = 2;
2572			    flag = 1;
2573			  }
2574			else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
2575			  {
2576			    cmpltr = 3;
2577			    flag = 1;
2578			  }
2579			else if (strcasecmp (name, ">>=") == 0)
2580			  {
2581			    cmpltr = 4;
2582			    flag = 1;
2583			  }
2584			else if (strcasecmp (name, ">>") == 0)
2585			  {
2586			    cmpltr = 5;
2587			    flag = 1;
2588			  }
2589			else if (strcasecmp (name, "nsv") == 0)
2590			  {
2591			    cmpltr = 6;
2592			    flag = 1;
2593			  }
2594			else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
2595			  {
2596			    cmpltr = 7;
2597			    flag = 1;
2598			  }
2599			/* ",*" is a valid condition.  */
2600			else if (*args != 'S' || *name)
2601			  as_bad (_("Invalid Compare/Subtract Condition: %s"),
2602				  name);
2603			*s = c;
2604		      }
2605		    opcode |= cmpltr << 13;
2606		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 12);
2607
2608		  /* Handle a non-negated compare condition.  */
2609		  case 't':
2610		    cmpltr = pa_parse_nonneg_cmpsub_cmpltr (&s);
2611		    if (cmpltr < 0)
2612		      {
2613			as_bad (_("Invalid Compare/Subtract Condition"));
2614			cmpltr = 0;
2615		      }
2616		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
2617
2618		  /* Handle a 32 bit compare and branch condition.  */
2619		  case 'n':
2620		    save_s = s;
2621		    cmpltr = pa_parse_nonneg_cmpsub_cmpltr (&s);
2622		    if (cmpltr < 0)
2623		      {
2624			s = save_s;
2625			cmpltr = pa_parse_neg_cmpsub_cmpltr (&s);
2626			if (cmpltr < 0)
2627			  {
2628			    as_bad (_("Invalid Compare and Branch Condition"));
2629			    cmpltr = 0;
2630			  }
2631			else
2632			  {
2633			    /* Negated condition requires an opcode change.  */
2634			    opcode |= 1 << 27;
2635			  }
2636		      }
2637
2638		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
2639
2640		  /* Handle a 64 bit compare and branch condition.  */
2641		  case 'N':
2642		    cmpltr = pa_parse_cmpb_64_cmpltr (&s);
2643		    if (cmpltr >= 0)
2644		      {
2645			/* Negated condition requires an opcode change.  */
2646			opcode |= (cmpltr & 8) << 26;
2647		      }
2648		    else
2649		      /* Not a 64 bit cond.  Give 32 bit a chance.  */
2650		      break;
2651
2652		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr & 7, 13);
2653
2654		  /* Handle a 64 bit cmpib condition.  */
2655		  case 'Q':
2656		    cmpltr = pa_parse_cmpib_64_cmpltr (&s);
2657		    if (cmpltr < 0)
2658		      /* Not a 64 bit cond.  Give 32 bit a chance.  */
2659		      break;
2660
2661		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
2662
2663		    /* Handle a logical instruction condition.  */
2664		  case 'L':
2665		  case 'l':
2666		    cmpltr = 0;
2667		    flag = 0;
2668		    if (*s == ',')
2669		      {
2670			s++;
2671
2672			/* 64 bit conditions.  */
2673			if (*args == 'L')
2674			  {
2675			    if (*s == '*')
2676			      s++;
2677			    else
2678			      break;
2679			  }
2680			else if (*s == '*')
2681			  break;
2682
2683			name = s;
2684			while (*s != ',' && *s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
2685			  s += 1;
2686			c = *s;
2687			*s = 0x00;
2688
2689			if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
2690			  cmpltr = 1;
2691			else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
2692			  cmpltr = 2;
2693			else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
2694			  cmpltr = 3;
2695			else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
2696			  cmpltr = 7;
2697			else if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
2698			  {
2699			    cmpltr = 0;
2700			    flag = 1;
2701			  }
2702			else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
2703			  {
2704			    cmpltr = 1;
2705			    flag = 1;
2706			  }
2707			else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
2708			  {
2709			    cmpltr = 2;
2710			    flag = 1;
2711			  }
2712			else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
2713			  {
2714			    cmpltr = 3;
2715			    flag = 1;
2716			  }
2717			else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
2718			  {
2719			    cmpltr = 7;
2720			    flag = 1;
2721			  }
2722			/* ",*" is a valid condition.  */
2723			else if (*args != 'L' || *name)
2724			  as_bad (_("Invalid Logical Instruction Condition."));
2725			*s = c;
2726		      }
2727		    opcode |= cmpltr << 13;
2728		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 12);
2729
2730		  /* Handle a shift/extract/deposit condition.  */
2731		  case 'X':
2732		  case 'x':
2733		  case 'y':
2734		    cmpltr = 0;
2735		    if (*s == ',')
2736		      {
2737			save_s = s++;
2738
2739			/* 64 bit conditions.  */
2740			if (*args == 'X')
2741			  {
2742			    if (*s == '*')
2743			      s++;
2744			    else
2745			      break;
2746			  }
2747			else if (*s == '*')
2748			  break;
2749
2750			name = s;
2751			while (*s != ',' && *s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
2752			  s += 1;
2753			c = *s;
2754			*s = 0x00;
2755			if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
2756			  cmpltr = 1;
2757			else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
2758			  cmpltr = 2;
2759			else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
2760			  cmpltr = 3;
2761			else if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
2762			  cmpltr = 4;
2763			else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
2764			  cmpltr = 5;
2765			else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
2766			  cmpltr = 6;
2767			else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
2768			  cmpltr = 7;
2769			/* Handle movb,n.  Put things back the way they were.
2770			   This includes moving s back to where it started.  */
2771			else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0 && *args == 'y')
2772			  {
2773			    *s = c;
2774			    s = save_s;
2775			    continue;
2776			  }
2777			/* ",*" is a valid condition.  */
2778			else if (*args != 'X' || *name)
2779			  as_bad (_("Invalid Shift/Extract/Deposit Condition."));
2780			*s = c;
2781		      }
2782		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
2783
2784		  /* Handle a unit instruction condition.  */
2785		  case 'U':
2786		  case 'u':
2787		    cmpltr = 0;
2788		    flag = 0;
2789		    if (*s == ',')
2790		      {
2791			s++;
2792
2793			/* 64 bit conditions.  */
2794			if (*args == 'U')
2795			  {
2796			    if (*s == '*')
2797			      s++;
2798			    else
2799			      break;
2800			  }
2801			else if (*s == '*')
2802			  break;
2803
2804			if (strncasecmp (s, "sbz", 3) == 0)
2805			  {
2806			    cmpltr = 2;
2807			    s += 3;
2808			  }
2809			else if (strncasecmp (s, "shz", 3) == 0)
2810			  {
2811			    cmpltr = 3;
2812			    s += 3;
2813			  }
2814			else if (strncasecmp (s, "sdc", 3) == 0)
2815			  {
2816			    cmpltr = 4;
2817			    s += 3;
2818			  }
2819			else if (strncasecmp (s, "sbc", 3) == 0)
2820			  {
2821			    cmpltr = 6;
2822			    s += 3;
2823			  }
2824			else if (strncasecmp (s, "shc", 3) == 0)
2825			  {
2826			    cmpltr = 7;
2827			    s += 3;
2828			  }
2829			else if (strncasecmp (s, "tr", 2) == 0)
2830			  {
2831			    cmpltr = 0;
2832			    flag = 1;
2833			    s += 2;
2834			  }
2835			else if (strncasecmp (s, "nbz", 3) == 0)
2836			  {
2837			    cmpltr = 2;
2838			    flag = 1;
2839			    s += 3;
2840			  }
2841			else if (strncasecmp (s, "nhz", 3) == 0)
2842			  {
2843			    cmpltr = 3;
2844			    flag = 1;
2845			    s += 3;
2846			  }
2847			else if (strncasecmp (s, "ndc", 3) == 0)
2848			  {
2849			    cmpltr = 4;
2850			    flag = 1;
2851			    s += 3;
2852			  }
2853			else if (strncasecmp (s, "nbc", 3) == 0)
2854			  {
2855			    cmpltr = 6;
2856			    flag = 1;
2857			    s += 3;
2858			  }
2859			else if (strncasecmp (s, "nhc", 3) == 0)
2860			  {
2861			    cmpltr = 7;
2862			    flag = 1;
2863			    s += 3;
2864			  }
2865			else if (strncasecmp (s, "swz", 3) == 0)
2866			  {
2867			    cmpltr = 1;
2868			    flag = 0;
2869			    s += 3;
2870			  }
2871			else if (strncasecmp (s, "swc", 3) == 0)
2872			  {
2873			    cmpltr = 5;
2874			    flag = 0;
2875			    s += 3;
2876			  }
2877			else if (strncasecmp (s, "nwz", 3) == 0)
2878			  {
2879			    cmpltr = 1;
2880			    flag = 1;
2881			    s += 3;
2882			  }
2883			else if (strncasecmp (s, "nwc", 3) == 0)
2884			  {
2885			    cmpltr = 5;
2886			    flag = 1;
2887			    s += 3;
2888			  }
2889			/* ",*" is a valid condition.  */
2890			else if (*args != 'U' || (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t'))
2891			  as_bad (_("Invalid Unit Instruction Condition."));
2892		      }
2893		    opcode |= cmpltr << 13;
2894		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 12);
2895
2896		  default:
2897		    abort ();
2898		  }
2899		break;
2900	      }
2901
2902	    /* Handle a nullification completer for branch instructions.  */
2903	    case 'n':
2904	      nullif = pa_parse_nullif (&s);
2905	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, nullif, 1);
2906
2907	    /* Handle a nullification completer for copr and spop insns.  */
2908	    case 'N':
2909	      nullif = pa_parse_nullif (&s);
2910	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, nullif, 5);
2911
2912	    /* Handle ,%r2 completer for new syntax branches.  */
2913	    case 'L':
2914	      if (*s == ',' && strncasecmp (s + 1, "%r2", 3) == 0)
2915		s += 4;
2916	      else if (*s == ',' && strncasecmp (s + 1, "%rp", 3) == 0)
2917		s += 4;
2918	      else
2919		break;
2920	      continue;
2921
2922	    /* Handle 3 bit entry into the fp compare array.   Valid values
2923	       are 0..6 inclusive.  */
2924	    case 'h':
2925	      get_expression (s);
2926	      s = expr_end;
2927	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
2928		{
2929		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
2930		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 6, 0, 0);
2931		  num++;
2932		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 13);
2933		}
2934	      else
2935		break;
2936
2937	    /* Handle 3 bit entry into the fp compare array.   Valid values
2938	       are 0..6 inclusive.  */
2939	    case 'm':
2940	      get_expression (s);
2941	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
2942		{
2943		  s = expr_end;
2944		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
2945		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 6, 0, 0);
2946		  num = (num + 1) ^ 1;
2947		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 13);
2948		}
2949	      else
2950		break;
2951
2952	    /* Handle graphics test completers for ftest */
2953	    case '=':
2954	      {
2955		num = pa_parse_ftest_gfx_completer (&s);
2956		INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
2957	      }
2958
2959	    /* Handle a 11 bit immediate at 31.  */
2960	    case 'i':
2961	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
2962	      get_expression (s);
2963	      s = expr_end;
2964	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
2965		{
2966		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
2967		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 1023, -1024, 0);
2968		  num = low_sign_unext (num, 11);
2969		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
2970		}
2971	      else
2972		{
2973		  if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
2974		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
2975		  else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
2976		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
2977		  else
2978		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
2979		  the_insn.format = 11;
2980		  continue;
2981		}
2982
2983	    /* Handle a 14 bit immediate at 31.  */
2984	    case 'J':
2985	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
2986	      get_expression (s);
2987	      s = expr_end;
2988	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
2989		{
2990		  int mb;
2991
2992		  /* XXX the completer stored away tidbits of information
2993		     for us to extract.  We need a cleaner way to do this.
2994		     Now that we have lots of letters again, it would be
2995		     good to rethink this.  */
2996		  mb = opcode & 1;
2997		  opcode -= mb;
2998		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
2999		  if (mb != (num < 0))
3000		    break;
3001		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
3002		  num = low_sign_unext (num, 14);
3003		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3004		}
3005	      break;
3006
3007	    /* Handle a 14 bit immediate at 31.  */
3008	    case 'K':
3009	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3010	      get_expression (s);
3011	      s = expr_end;
3012	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
3013		{
3014		  int mb;
3015
3016		  mb = opcode & 1;
3017		  opcode -= mb;
3018		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3019		  if (mb == (num < 0))
3020		    break;
3021		  if (num % 4)
3022		    break;
3023		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
3024		  num = low_sign_unext (num, 14);
3025		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3026		}
3027	      break;
3028
3029	    /* Handle a 16 bit immediate at 31.  */
3030	    case '<':
3031	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3032	      get_expression (s);
3033	      s = expr_end;
3034	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
3035		{
3036		  int mb;
3037
3038		  mb = opcode & 1;
3039		  opcode -= mb;
3040		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3041		  if (mb != (num < 0))
3042		    break;
3043		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, -32768, 0);
3044		  num = re_assemble_16 (num);
3045		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3046		}
3047	      break;
3048
3049	    /* Handle a 16 bit immediate at 31.  */
3050	    case '>':
3051	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3052	      get_expression (s);
3053	      s = expr_end;
3054	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
3055		{
3056		  int mb;
3057
3058		  mb = opcode & 1;
3059		  opcode -= mb;
3060		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3061		  if (mb == (num < 0))
3062		    break;
3063		  if (num % 4)
3064		    break;
3065		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, -32768, 0);
3066		  num = re_assemble_16 (num);
3067		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3068		}
3069	      break;
3070
3071	    /* Handle 14 bit immediate, shifted left three times.  */
3072	    case '#':
3073	      if (bfd_get_mach (stdoutput) != pa20)
3074		break;
3075	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3076	      get_expression (s);
3077	      s = expr_end;
3078	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
3079		{
3080		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3081		  if (num & 0x7)
3082		    break;
3083		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
3084		  if (num < 0)
3085		    opcode |= 1;
3086		  num &= 0x1fff;
3087		  num >>= 3;
3088		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 4);
3089		}
3090	      else
3091		{
3092		  if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
3093		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
3094		  else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
3095		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
3096		  else
3097		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
3098		  the_insn.format = 14;
3099		  continue;
3100		}
3101	      break;
3102
3103	    /* Handle 14 bit immediate, shifted left twice.  */
3104	    case 'd':
3105	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3106	      get_expression (s);
3107	      s = expr_end;
3108	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
3109		{
3110		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3111		  if (num & 0x3)
3112		    break;
3113		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
3114		  if (num < 0)
3115		    opcode |= 1;
3116		  num &= 0x1fff;
3117		  num >>= 2;
3118		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 3);
3119		}
3120	      else
3121		{
3122		  if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
3123		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
3124		  else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
3125		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
3126		  else
3127		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
3128		  the_insn.format = 14;
3129		  continue;
3130		}
3131
3132	    /* Handle a 14 bit immediate at 31.  */
3133	    case 'j':
3134	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3135	      get_expression (s);
3136	      s = expr_end;
3137	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
3138		{
3139		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3140		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
3141		  num = low_sign_unext (num, 14);
3142		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3143		}
3144	      else
3145		{
3146		  if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
3147		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
3148		  else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
3149		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
3150		  else
3151		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
3152		  the_insn.format = 14;
3153		  continue;
3154		}
3155
3156	    /* Handle a 21 bit immediate at 31.  */
3157	    case 'k':
3158	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3159	      get_expression (s);
3160	      s = expr_end;
3161	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
3162		{
3163		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3164		  CHECK_FIELD (num >> 11, 1048575, -1048576, 0);
3165		  opcode |= re_assemble_21 (num);
3166		  continue;
3167		}
3168	      else
3169		{
3170		  if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
3171		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
3172		  else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
3173		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
3174		  else
3175		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
3176		  the_insn.format = 21;
3177		  continue;
3178		}
3179
3180	    /* Handle a 16 bit immediate at 31 (PA 2.0 wide mode only).  */
3181	    case 'l':
3182	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3183	      get_expression (s);
3184	      s = expr_end;
3185	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
3186		{
3187		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3188		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, -32768, 0);
3189		  opcode |= re_assemble_16 (num);
3190		  continue;
3191		}
3192	      else
3193		{
3194		  /* ??? Is this valid for wide mode?  */
3195		  if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
3196		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
3197		  else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
3198		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
3199		  else
3200		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
3201		  the_insn.format = 14;
3202		  continue;
3203		}
3204
3205	    /* Handle a word-aligned 16-bit imm. at 31 (PA2.0 wide).  */
3206	    case 'y':
3207	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3208	      get_expression (s);
3209	      s = expr_end;
3210	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
3211		{
3212		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3213		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, -32768, 0);
3214		  CHECK_ALIGN (num, 4, 0);
3215		  opcode |= re_assemble_16 (num);
3216		  continue;
3217		}
3218	      else
3219		{
3220		  /* ??? Is this valid for wide mode?  */
3221		  if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
3222		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
3223		  else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
3224		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
3225		  else
3226		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
3227		  the_insn.format = 14;
3228		  continue;
3229		}
3230
3231	    /* Handle a dword-aligned 16-bit imm. at 31 (PA2.0 wide).  */
3232	    case '&':
3233	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3234	      get_expression (s);
3235	      s = expr_end;
3236	      if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
3237		{
3238		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3239		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, -32768, 0);
3240		  CHECK_ALIGN (num, 8, 0);
3241		  opcode |= re_assemble_16 (num);
3242		  continue;
3243		}
3244	      else
3245		{
3246		  /* ??? Is this valid for wide mode?  */
3247		  if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
3248		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
3249		  else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
3250		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
3251		  else
3252		    the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
3253		  the_insn.format = 14;
3254		  continue;
3255		}
3256
3257	    /* Handle a 12 bit branch displacement.  */
3258	    case 'w':
3259	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3260	      get_expression (s);
3261	      s = expr_end;
3262	      the_insn.pcrel = 1;
3263	      if (!the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol
3264		  || !strcmp (S_GET_NAME (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol),
3265			      FAKE_LABEL_NAME))
3266		{
3267		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3268		  if (num % 4)
3269		    {
3270		      as_bad (_("Branch to unaligned address"));
3271		      break;
3272		    }
3273		  if (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol)
3274		    num -= 8;
3275		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
3276		  opcode |= re_assemble_12 (num >> 2);
3277		  continue;
3278		}
3279	      else
3280		{
3281		  the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
3282		  the_insn.format = 12;
3283		  the_insn.arg_reloc = last_call_desc.arg_reloc;
3284		  memset (&last_call_desc, 0, sizeof (struct call_desc));
3285		  s = expr_end;
3286		  continue;
3287		}
3288
3289	    /* Handle a 17 bit branch displacement.  */
3290	    case 'W':
3291	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3292	      get_expression (s);
3293	      s = expr_end;
3294	      the_insn.pcrel = 1;
3295	      if (!the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol
3296		  || !strcmp (S_GET_NAME (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol),
3297			      FAKE_LABEL_NAME))
3298		{
3299		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3300		  if (num % 4)
3301		    {
3302		      as_bad (_("Branch to unaligned address"));
3303		      break;
3304		    }
3305		  if (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol)
3306		    num -= 8;
3307		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 262143, -262144, 0);
3308		  opcode |= re_assemble_17 (num >> 2);
3309		  continue;
3310		}
3311	      else
3312		{
3313		  the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
3314		  the_insn.format = 17;
3315		  the_insn.arg_reloc = last_call_desc.arg_reloc;
3316		  memset (&last_call_desc, 0, sizeof (struct call_desc));
3317		  continue;
3318		}
3319
3320	    /* Handle a 22 bit branch displacement.  */
3321	    case 'X':
3322	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3323	      get_expression (s);
3324	      s = expr_end;
3325	      the_insn.pcrel = 1;
3326	      if (!the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol
3327		  || !strcmp (S_GET_NAME (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol),
3328			      FAKE_LABEL_NAME))
3329		{
3330		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3331		  if (num % 4)
3332		    {
3333		      as_bad (_("Branch to unaligned address"));
3334		      break;
3335		    }
3336		  if (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol)
3337		    num -= 8;
3338		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 8388607, -8388608, 0);
3339		  opcode |= re_assemble_22 (num >> 2);
3340		}
3341	      else
3342		{
3343		  the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
3344		  the_insn.format = 22;
3345		  the_insn.arg_reloc = last_call_desc.arg_reloc;
3346		  memset (&last_call_desc, 0, sizeof (struct call_desc));
3347		  continue;
3348		}
3349
3350	    /* Handle an absolute 17 bit branch target.  */
3351	    case 'z':
3352	      the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
3353	      get_expression (s);
3354	      s = expr_end;
3355	      the_insn.pcrel = 0;
3356	      if (!the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol
3357		  || !strcmp (S_GET_NAME (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol),
3358			      FAKE_LABEL_NAME))
3359		{
3360		  num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
3361		  if (num % 4)
3362		    {
3363		      as_bad (_("Branch to unaligned address"));
3364		      break;
3365		    }
3366		  if (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol)
3367		    num -= 8;
3368		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 262143, -262144, 0);
3369		  opcode |= re_assemble_17 (num >> 2);
3370		  continue;
3371		}
3372	      else
3373		{
3374		  the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_ABS_CALL;
3375		  the_insn.format = 17;
3376		  the_insn.arg_reloc = last_call_desc.arg_reloc;
3377		  memset (&last_call_desc, 0, sizeof (struct call_desc));
3378		  continue;
3379		}
3380
3381	    /* Handle '%r1' implicit operand of addil instruction.  */
3382	    case 'Z':
3383	      if (*s == ',' && *(s + 1) == '%' && *(s + 3) == '1'
3384		  && (*(s + 2) == 'r' || *(s + 2) == 'R'))
3385		{
3386		  s += 4;
3387		  continue;
3388		}
3389	      else
3390	        break;
3391
3392	    /* Handle '%sr0,%r31' implicit operand of be,l instruction.  */
3393	    case 'Y':
3394	      if (strncasecmp (s, "%sr0,%r31", 9) != 0)
3395		break;
3396	      s += 9;
3397	      continue;
3398
3399	    /* Handle immediate value of 0 for ordered load/store instructions.  */
3400	    case '@':
3401	      if (*s != '0')
3402		break;
3403	      s++;
3404	      continue;
3405
3406	    /* Handle a 2 bit shift count at 25.  */
3407	    case '.':
3408	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3409	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3410		break;
3411	      s = expr_end;
3412	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 3, 1, strict);
3413	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 6);
3414
3415	    /* Handle a 4 bit shift count at 25.  */
3416	    case '*':
3417	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3418	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3419		break;
3420	      s = expr_end;
3421	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 15, 0, strict);
3422	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 6);
3423
3424	    /* Handle a 5 bit shift count at 26.  */
3425	    case 'p':
3426	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3427	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3428		break;
3429	      s = expr_end;
3430	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, strict);
3431	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, 31 - num, 5);
3432
3433	    /* Handle a 6 bit shift count at 20,22:26.  */
3434	    case '~':
3435	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3436	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3437		break;
3438	      s = expr_end;
3439	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 63, 0, strict);
3440	      num = 63 - num;
3441	      opcode |= (num & 0x20) << 6;
3442	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num & 0x1f, 5);
3443
3444	    /* Handle a 6 bit field length at 23,27:31.  */
3445	    case '%':
3446	      flag = 0;
3447	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3448	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3449		break;
3450	      s = expr_end;
3451	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 64, 1, strict);
3452	      num--;
3453	      opcode |= (num & 0x20) << 3;
3454	      num = 31 - (num & 0x1f);
3455	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3456
3457	    /* Handle a 6 bit field length at 19,27:31.  */
3458	    case '|':
3459	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3460	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3461		break;
3462	      s = expr_end;
3463	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 64, 1, strict);
3464	      num--;
3465	      opcode |= (num & 0x20) << 7;
3466	      num = 31 - (num & 0x1f);
3467	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3468
3469	    /* Handle a 5 bit bit position at 26.  */
3470	    case 'P':
3471	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3472	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3473		break;
3474	      s = expr_end;
3475	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, strict);
3476	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 5);
3477
3478	    /* Handle a 6 bit bit position at 20,22:26.  */
3479	    case 'q':
3480	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3481	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3482		break;
3483	      s = expr_end;
3484	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 63, 0, strict);
3485	      opcode |= (num & 0x20) << 6;
3486	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num & 0x1f, 5);
3487
3488	    /* Handle a 5 bit immediate at 10 with 'd' as the complement
3489	       of the high bit of the immediate.  */
3490	    case 'B':
3491	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3492	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3493		break;
3494	      s = expr_end;
3495	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 63, 0, strict);
3496	      if (num & 0x20)
3497		;
3498	      else
3499		opcode |= (1 << 13);
3500	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num & 0x1f, 21);
3501
3502	    /* Handle a 5 bit immediate at 10.  */
3503	    case 'Q':
3504	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3505	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3506		break;
3507	      s = expr_end;
3508	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, strict);
3509	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 21);
3510
3511	    /* Handle a 9 bit immediate at 28.  */
3512	    case '$':
3513	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3514	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3515		break;
3516	      s = expr_end;
3517	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 511, 1, strict);
3518	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 3);
3519
3520	    /* Handle a 13 bit immediate at 18.  */
3521	    case 'A':
3522	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3523	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3524		break;
3525	      s = expr_end;
3526	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, 0, strict);
3527	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 13);
3528
3529	    /* Handle a 26 bit immediate at 31.  */
3530	    case 'D':
3531	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3532	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3533		break;
3534	      s = expr_end;
3535	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 67108863, 0, strict);
3536	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3537
3538	    /* Handle a 3 bit SFU identifier at 25.  */
3539	    case 'v':
3540	      if (*s++ != ',')
3541		as_bad (_("Invalid SFU identifier"));
3542	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3543	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3544		break;
3545	      s = expr_end;
3546	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 7, 0, strict);
3547	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 6);
3548
3549	    /* Handle a 20 bit SOP field for spop0.  */
3550	    case 'O':
3551	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3552	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3553		break;
3554	      s = expr_end;
3555	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 1048575, 0, strict);
3556	      num = (num & 0x1f) | ((num & 0x000fffe0) << 6);
3557	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3558
3559	    /* Handle a 15bit SOP field for spop1.  */
3560	    case 'o':
3561	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3562	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3563		break;
3564	      s = expr_end;
3565	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, 0, strict);
3566	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 11);
3567
3568	    /* Handle a 10bit SOP field for spop3.  */
3569	    case '0':
3570	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3571	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3572		break;
3573	      s = expr_end;
3574	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 1023, 0, strict);
3575	      num = (num & 0x1f) | ((num & 0x000003e0) << 6);
3576	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3577
3578	    /* Handle a 15 bit SOP field for spop2.  */
3579	    case '1':
3580	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3581	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3582		break;
3583	      s = expr_end;
3584	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, 0, strict);
3585	      num = (num & 0x1f) | ((num & 0x00007fe0) << 6);
3586	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3587
3588	    /* Handle a 3-bit co-processor ID field.  */
3589	    case 'u':
3590	      if (*s++ != ',')
3591		as_bad (_("Invalid COPR identifier"));
3592	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3593	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3594		break;
3595	      s = expr_end;
3596	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 7, 0, strict);
3597	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 6);
3598
3599	    /* Handle a 22bit SOP field for copr.  */
3600	    case '2':
3601	      num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3602	      if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3603		break;
3604	      s = expr_end;
3605	      CHECK_FIELD (num, 4194303, 0, strict);
3606	      num = (num & 0x1f) | ((num & 0x003fffe0) << 4);
3607	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3608
3609	    /* Handle a source FP operand format completer.  */
3610	    case '{':
3611	      if (*s == ',' && *(s+1) == 't')
3612		{
3613		  the_insn.trunc = 1;
3614		  s += 2;
3615		}
3616	      else
3617		the_insn.trunc = 0;
3618	      flag = pa_parse_fp_cnv_format (&s);
3619	      the_insn.fpof1 = flag;
3620	      if (flag == W || flag == UW)
3621		flag = SGL;
3622	      if (flag == DW || flag == UDW)
3623		flag = DBL;
3624	      if (flag == QW || flag == UQW)
3625		flag = QUAD;
3626	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
3627
3628	    /* Handle a destination FP operand format completer.  */
3629	    case '_':
3630	      /* pa_parse_format needs the ',' prefix.  */
3631	      s--;
3632	      flag = pa_parse_fp_cnv_format (&s);
3633	      the_insn.fpof2 = flag;
3634	      if (flag == W || flag == UW)
3635		flag = SGL;
3636	      if (flag == DW || flag == UDW)
3637		flag = DBL;
3638	      if (flag == QW || flag == UQW)
3639		flag = QUAD;
3640	      opcode |= flag << 13;
3641	      if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL
3642		  || the_insn.fpof1 == DBL
3643		  || the_insn.fpof1 == QUAD)
3644		{
3645		  if (the_insn.fpof2 == SGL
3646		      || the_insn.fpof2 == DBL
3647		      || the_insn.fpof2 == QUAD)
3648		    flag = 0;
3649		  else if (the_insn.fpof2 == W
3650		      || the_insn.fpof2 == DW
3651		      || the_insn.fpof2 == QW)
3652		    flag = 2;
3653		  else if (the_insn.fpof2 == UW
3654		      || the_insn.fpof2 == UDW
3655		      || the_insn.fpof2 == UQW)
3656		    flag = 6;
3657		  else
3658		    abort ();
3659		}
3660	      else if (the_insn.fpof1 == W
3661		       || the_insn.fpof1 == DW
3662		       || the_insn.fpof1 == QW)
3663		{
3664		  if (the_insn.fpof2 == SGL
3665		      || the_insn.fpof2 == DBL
3666		      || the_insn.fpof2 == QUAD)
3667		    flag = 1;
3668		  else
3669		    abort ();
3670		}
3671	      else if (the_insn.fpof1 == UW
3672		       || the_insn.fpof1 == UDW
3673		       || the_insn.fpof1 == UQW)
3674		{
3675		  if (the_insn.fpof2 == SGL
3676		      || the_insn.fpof2 == DBL
3677		      || the_insn.fpof2 == QUAD)
3678		    flag = 5;
3679		  else
3680		    abort ();
3681		}
3682	      flag |= the_insn.trunc;
3683	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 15);
3684
3685	    /* Handle a source FP operand format completer.  */
3686	    case 'F':
3687	      flag = pa_parse_fp_format (&s);
3688	      the_insn.fpof1 = flag;
3689	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
3690
3691	    /* Handle a destination FP operand format completer.  */
3692	    case 'G':
3693	      /* pa_parse_format needs the ',' prefix.  */
3694	      s--;
3695	      flag = pa_parse_fp_format (&s);
3696	      the_insn.fpof2 = flag;
3697	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 13);
3698
3699	    /* Handle a source FP operand format completer at 20.  */
3700	    case 'I':
3701	      flag = pa_parse_fp_format (&s);
3702	      the_insn.fpof1 = flag;
3703	      INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
3704
3705	    /* Handle a floating point operand format at 26.
3706	       Only allows single and double precision.  */
3707	    case 'H':
3708	      flag = pa_parse_fp_format (&s);
3709	      switch (flag)
3710		{
3711		case SGL:
3712		  opcode |= 0x20;
3713		case DBL:
3714		  the_insn.fpof1 = flag;
3715		  continue;
3716
3717		case QUAD:
3718		case ILLEGAL_FMT:
3719		default:
3720		  as_bad (_("Invalid Floating Point Operand Format."));
3721		}
3722	      break;
3723
3724	    /* Handle all floating point registers.  */
3725	    case 'f':
3726	      switch (*++args)
3727	        {
3728		/* Float target register.  */
3729		case 't':
3730		  if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 3))
3731		    break;
3732		  num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3733		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3734		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3735
3736		/* Float target register with L/R selection.  */
3737		case 'T':
3738		  {
3739		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3740		      break;
3741		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3742		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3743		    opcode |= num;
3744
3745		    /* 0x30 opcodes are FP arithmetic operation opcodes
3746		       and need to be turned into 0x38 opcodes.  This
3747		       is not necessary for loads/stores.  */
3748		    if (need_pa11_opcode ()
3749			&& ((opcode & 0xfc000000) == 0x30000000))
3750		      opcode |= 1 << 27;
3751
3752		    opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 6 : 0);
3753		    continue;
3754		  }
3755
3756		/* Float operand 1.  */
3757		case 'a':
3758		  {
3759		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3760		      break;
3761		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3762		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3763		    opcode |= num << 21;
3764		    if (need_pa11_opcode ())
3765		      {
3766			opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 7 : 0);
3767			opcode |= 1 << 27;
3768		      }
3769		    continue;
3770		  }
3771
3772		/* Float operand 1 with L/R selection.  */
3773		case 'X':
3774		case 'A':
3775		  {
3776		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3777		      break;
3778		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3779		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3780		    opcode |= num << 21;
3781		    opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 7 : 0);
3782		    continue;
3783		  }
3784
3785		/* Float operand 2.  */
3786		case 'b':
3787		  {
3788		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3789		      break;
3790		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3791		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3792		    opcode |= num << 16;
3793		    if (need_pa11_opcode ())
3794		      {
3795			opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 12 : 0);
3796			opcode |= 1 << 27;
3797		      }
3798		    continue;
3799		  }
3800
3801		/* Float operand 2 with L/R selection.  */
3802		case 'B':
3803		  {
3804		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3805		      break;
3806		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3807		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3808		    opcode |= num << 16;
3809		    opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 12 : 0);
3810		    continue;
3811		  }
3812
3813		/* Float operand 3 for fmpyfadd, fmpynfadd.  */
3814		case 'C':
3815		  {
3816		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3817		      break;
3818		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3819		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3820		    opcode |= (num & 0x1c) << 11;
3821		    opcode |= (num & 0x03) << 9;
3822		    opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 8 : 0);
3823		    continue;
3824		  }
3825
3826		/* Float mult operand 1 for fmpyadd, fmpysub */
3827		case 'i':
3828		  {
3829		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3830		      break;
3831		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3832		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3833		    if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL)
3834		      {
3835			if (num < 16)
3836			  {
3837			    as_bad  (_("Invalid register for single precision fmpyadd or fmpysub"));
3838			    break;
3839			  }
3840			num &= 0xF;
3841			num |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 4 : 0);
3842		      }
3843		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 21);
3844		  }
3845
3846		/* Float mult operand 2 for fmpyadd, fmpysub */
3847		case 'j':
3848		  {
3849		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3850		      break;
3851		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3852		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3853		    if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL)
3854		      {
3855		        if (num < 16)
3856		          {
3857			    as_bad  (_("Invalid register for single precision fmpyadd or fmpysub"));
3858			    break;
3859		          }
3860		        num &= 0xF;
3861		        num |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 4 : 0);
3862		      }
3863		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
3864		  }
3865
3866		/* Float mult target for fmpyadd, fmpysub */
3867		case 'k':
3868		  {
3869		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3870		      break;
3871		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3872		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3873		    if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL)
3874		      {
3875		        if (num < 16)
3876		          {
3877			    as_bad  (_("Invalid register for single precision fmpyadd or fmpysub"));
3878			    break;
3879		          }
3880		        num &= 0xF;
3881		        num |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 4 : 0);
3882		      }
3883		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3884		  }
3885
3886		/* Float add operand 1 for fmpyadd, fmpysub */
3887		case 'l':
3888		  {
3889		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3890		      break;
3891		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3892		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3893		    if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL)
3894		      {
3895		        if (num < 16)
3896		          {
3897			    as_bad  (_("Invalid register for single precision fmpyadd or fmpysub"));
3898			    break;
3899		          }
3900		        num &= 0xF;
3901		        num |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 4 : 0);
3902		      }
3903		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 6);
3904		  }
3905
3906		/* Float add target for fmpyadd, fmpysub */
3907		case 'm':
3908		  {
3909		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3910		      break;
3911		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3912		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3913		    if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL)
3914		      {
3915		        if (num < 16)
3916		          {
3917			    as_bad  (_("Invalid register for single precision fmpyadd or fmpysub"));
3918			    break;
3919		          }
3920		        num &= 0xF;
3921		        num |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 4 : 0);
3922		      }
3923		    INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 11);
3924		  }
3925
3926		/* Handle L/R register halves like 'x'.  */
3927		case 'E':
3928		case 'e':
3929		  {
3930		    if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
3931		      break;
3932		    num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3933		    CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3934		    opcode |= num << 16;
3935		    if (need_pa11_opcode ())
3936		      {
3937			opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 1 : 0);
3938		      }
3939		    continue;
3940		  }
3941
3942		/* Float target register (PA 2.0 wide).  */
3943		case 'x':
3944		  if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 3))
3945		    break;
3946		  num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
3947		  CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3948		  INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
3949
3950		default:
3951		  abort ();
3952		}
3953	      break;
3954
3955	    default:
3956	      abort ();
3957	    }
3958	  break;
3959	}
3960
3961      /* If this instruction is specific to a particular architecture,
3962	 then set a new architecture.  This automatic promotion crud is
3963	 for compatibility with HP's old assemblers only.  */
3964      if (match == TRUE
3965	  && bfd_get_mach (stdoutput) < insn->arch
3966	  && !bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, insn->arch))
3967	{
3968	  as_warn (_("could not update architecture and machine"));
3969	  match = FALSE;
3970	}
3971
3972 failed:
3973      /* Check if the args matched.  */
3974      if (!match)
3975	{
3976	  if (&insn[1] - pa_opcodes < (int) NUMOPCODES
3977	      && !strcmp (insn->name, insn[1].name))
3978	    {
3979	      ++insn;
3980	      s = argstart;
3981	      continue;
3982	    }
3983	  else
3984	    {
3985	      as_bad (_("Invalid operands %s"), error_message);
3986	      return;
3987	    }
3988	}
3989      break;
3990    }
3991
3992  the_insn.opcode = opcode;
3993}
3994
3995/* Turn a string in input_line_pointer into a floating point constant of type
3996   type, and store the appropriate bytes in *litP.  The number of LITTLENUMS
3997   emitted is stored in *sizeP .  An error message or NULL is returned.  */
3998
3999#define MAX_LITTLENUMS 6
4000
4001char *
4002md_atof (type, litP, sizeP)
4003     char type;
4004     char *litP;
4005     int *sizeP;
4006{
4007  int prec;
4008  LITTLENUM_TYPE words[MAX_LITTLENUMS];
4009  LITTLENUM_TYPE *wordP;
4010  char *t;
4011
4012  switch (type)
4013    {
4014
4015    case 'f':
4016    case 'F':
4017    case 's':
4018    case 'S':
4019      prec = 2;
4020      break;
4021
4022    case 'd':
4023    case 'D':
4024    case 'r':
4025    case 'R':
4026      prec = 4;
4027      break;
4028
4029    case 'x':
4030    case 'X':
4031      prec = 6;
4032      break;
4033
4034    case 'p':
4035    case 'P':
4036      prec = 6;
4037      break;
4038
4039    default:
4040      *sizeP = 0;
4041      return _("Bad call to MD_ATOF()");
4042    }
4043  t = atof_ieee (input_line_pointer, type, words);
4044  if (t)
4045    input_line_pointer = t;
4046  *sizeP = prec * sizeof (LITTLENUM_TYPE);
4047  for (wordP = words; prec--;)
4048    {
4049      md_number_to_chars (litP, (valueT) (*wordP++), sizeof (LITTLENUM_TYPE));
4050      litP += sizeof (LITTLENUM_TYPE);
4051    }
4052  return NULL;
4053}
4054
4055/* Write out big-endian.  */
4056
4057void
4058md_number_to_chars (buf, val, n)
4059     char *buf;
4060     valueT val;
4061     int n;
4062{
4063  number_to_chars_bigendian (buf, val, n);
4064}
4065
4066/* Translate internal representation of relocation info to BFD target
4067   format.  */
4068
4069arelent **
4070tc_gen_reloc (section, fixp)
4071     asection *section;
4072     fixS *fixp;
4073{
4074  arelent *reloc;
4075  struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fixp;
4076  static arelent *no_relocs = NULL;
4077  arelent **relocs;
4078  reloc_type **codes;
4079  reloc_type code;
4080  int n_relocs;
4081  int i;
4082
4083  hppa_fixp = (struct hppa_fix_struct *) fixp->tc_fix_data;
4084  if (fixp->fx_addsy == 0)
4085    return &no_relocs;
4086
4087  assert (hppa_fixp != 0);
4088  assert (section != 0);
4089
4090  reloc = (arelent *) xmalloc (sizeof (arelent));
4091
4092  reloc->sym_ptr_ptr = (asymbol **) xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
4093  *reloc->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_addsy);
4094  codes = hppa_gen_reloc_type (stdoutput,
4095			       fixp->fx_r_type,
4096			       hppa_fixp->fx_r_format,
4097			       hppa_fixp->fx_r_field,
4098			       fixp->fx_subsy != NULL,
4099			       symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_addsy));
4100
4101  if (codes == NULL)
4102    {
4103      as_bad_where (fixp->fx_file, fixp->fx_line, _("Cannot handle fixup"));
4104      abort ();
4105    }
4106
4107  for (n_relocs = 0; codes[n_relocs]; n_relocs++)
4108    ;
4109
4110  relocs = (arelent **) xmalloc (sizeof (arelent *) * n_relocs + 1);
4111  reloc = (arelent *) xmalloc (sizeof (arelent) * n_relocs);
4112  for (i = 0; i < n_relocs; i++)
4113    relocs[i] = &reloc[i];
4114
4115  relocs[n_relocs] = NULL;
4116
4117#ifdef OBJ_ELF
4118  switch (fixp->fx_r_type)
4119    {
4120    default:
4121      assert (n_relocs == 1);
4122
4123      code = *codes[0];
4124
4125      /* Now, do any processing that is dependent on the relocation type.  */
4126      switch (code)
4127	{
4128	case R_PARISC_DLTREL21L:
4129	case R_PARISC_DLTREL14R:
4130	case R_PARISC_DLTREL14F:
4131	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
4132	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
4133	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
4134	  /* For plabel relocations, the addend of the
4135	     relocation should be either 0 (no static link) or 2
4136	     (static link required).  This adjustment is done in
4137	     bfd/elf32-hppa.c:elf32_hppa_relocate_section.
4138
4139	     We also slam a zero addend into the DLT relative relocs;
4140	     it doesn't make a lot of sense to use any addend since
4141	     it gets you a different (eg unknown) DLT entry.  */
4142	  reloc->addend = 0;
4143	  break;
4144
4145#ifdef ELF_ARG_RELOC
4146	case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
4147	case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
4148	case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
4149	case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
4150	case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
4151	case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
4152	case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
4153	  reloc->addend = HPPA_R_ADDEND (hppa_fixp->fx_arg_reloc,
4154					 fixp->fx_offset);
4155	  break;
4156#endif
4157
4158	case R_PARISC_DIR32:
4159	  /* Facilitate hand-crafted unwind info.  */
4160	  if (strcmp (section->name, UNWIND_SECTION_NAME) == 0)
4161	    code = R_PARISC_SEGREL32;
4162	  /* Fall thru */
4163
4164	default:
4165	  reloc->addend = fixp->fx_offset;
4166	  break;
4167	}
4168
4169      reloc->sym_ptr_ptr = (asymbol **) xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
4170      *reloc->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_addsy);
4171      reloc->howto = bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
4172					    (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) code);
4173      reloc->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
4174
4175      assert (reloc->howto && (unsigned int) code == reloc->howto->type);
4176      break;
4177    }
4178#else /* OBJ_SOM */
4179
4180  /* Walk over reach relocation returned by the BFD backend.  */
4181  for (i = 0; i < n_relocs; i++)
4182    {
4183      code = *codes[i];
4184
4185      relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = (asymbol **) xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
4186      *relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_addsy);
4187      relocs[i]->howto =
4188	bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
4189			       (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) code);
4190      relocs[i]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
4191
4192      switch (code)
4193	{
4194	case R_COMP2:
4195	  /* The only time we ever use a R_COMP2 fixup is for the difference
4196	     of two symbols.  With that in mind we fill in all four
4197	     relocs now and break out of the loop.  */
4198	  assert (i == 1);
4199	  relocs[0]->sym_ptr_ptr = (asymbol **) &(bfd_abs_symbol);
4200	  relocs[0]->howto =
4201	    bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
4202				   (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) *codes[0]);
4203	  relocs[0]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
4204	  relocs[0]->addend = 0;
4205	  relocs[1]->sym_ptr_ptr = (asymbol **) xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
4206	  *relocs[1]->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_addsy);
4207	  relocs[1]->howto =
4208	    bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
4209				   (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) *codes[1]);
4210	  relocs[1]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
4211	  relocs[1]->addend = 0;
4212	  relocs[2]->sym_ptr_ptr = (asymbol **) xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
4213	  *relocs[2]->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_subsy);
4214	  relocs[2]->howto =
4215	    bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
4216				   (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) *codes[2]);
4217	  relocs[2]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
4218	  relocs[2]->addend = 0;
4219	  relocs[3]->sym_ptr_ptr = (asymbol **) &(bfd_abs_symbol);
4220	  relocs[3]->howto =
4221	    bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
4222				   (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) *codes[3]);
4223	  relocs[3]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
4224	  relocs[3]->addend = 0;
4225	  relocs[4]->sym_ptr_ptr = (asymbol **) &(bfd_abs_symbol);
4226	  relocs[4]->howto =
4227	    bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
4228				   (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) *codes[4]);
4229	  relocs[4]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
4230	  relocs[4]->addend = 0;
4231	  goto done;
4232	case R_PCREL_CALL:
4233	case R_ABS_CALL:
4234	  relocs[i]->addend = HPPA_R_ADDEND (hppa_fixp->fx_arg_reloc, 0);
4235	  break;
4236
4237	case R_DLT_REL:
4238	case R_DATA_PLABEL:
4239	case R_CODE_PLABEL:
4240	  /* For plabel relocations, the addend of the
4241	     relocation should be either 0 (no static link) or 2
4242	     (static link required).
4243
4244	     FIXME: We always assume no static link!
4245
4246	     We also slam a zero addend into the DLT relative relocs;
4247	     it doesn't make a lot of sense to use any addend since
4248	     it gets you a different (eg unknown) DLT entry.  */
4249	  relocs[i]->addend = 0;
4250	  break;
4251
4252	case R_N_MODE:
4253	case R_S_MODE:
4254	case R_D_MODE:
4255	case R_R_MODE:
4256	case R_FSEL:
4257	case R_LSEL:
4258	case R_RSEL:
4259	case R_BEGIN_BRTAB:
4260	case R_END_BRTAB:
4261	case R_BEGIN_TRY:
4262	case R_N0SEL:
4263	case R_N1SEL:
4264	  /* There is no symbol or addend associated with these fixups.  */
4265	  relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = (asymbol **) xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
4266	  *relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (dummy_symbol);
4267	  relocs[i]->addend = 0;
4268	  break;
4269
4270	case R_END_TRY:
4271	case R_ENTRY:
4272	case R_EXIT:
4273	  /* There is no symbol associated with these fixups.  */
4274	  relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = (asymbol **) xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
4275	  *relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (dummy_symbol);
4276	  relocs[i]->addend = fixp->fx_offset;
4277	  break;
4278
4279	default:
4280	  relocs[i]->addend = fixp->fx_offset;
4281	}
4282    }
4283
4284 done:
4285#endif
4286
4287  return relocs;
4288}
4289
4290/* Process any machine dependent frag types.  */
4291
4292void
4293md_convert_frag (abfd, sec, fragP)
4294     register bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4295     register asection *sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4296     register fragS *fragP;
4297{
4298  unsigned int address;
4299
4300  if (fragP->fr_type == rs_machine_dependent)
4301    {
4302      switch ((int) fragP->fr_subtype)
4303	{
4304	case 0:
4305	  fragP->fr_type = rs_fill;
4306	  know (fragP->fr_var == 1);
4307	  know (fragP->fr_next);
4308	  address = fragP->fr_address + fragP->fr_fix;
4309	  if (address % fragP->fr_offset)
4310	    {
4311	      fragP->fr_offset =
4312		fragP->fr_next->fr_address
4313		- fragP->fr_address
4314		- fragP->fr_fix;
4315	    }
4316	  else
4317	    fragP->fr_offset = 0;
4318	  break;
4319	}
4320    }
4321}
4322
4323/* Round up a section size to the appropriate boundary.  */
4324
4325valueT
4326md_section_align (segment, size)
4327     asection *segment;
4328     valueT size;
4329{
4330  int align = bfd_get_section_alignment (stdoutput, segment);
4331  int align2 = (1 << align) - 1;
4332
4333  return (size + align2) & ~align2;
4334}
4335
4336/* Return the approximate size of a frag before relaxation has occurred.  */
4337int
4338md_estimate_size_before_relax (fragP, segment)
4339     register fragS *fragP;
4340     asection *segment ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4341{
4342  int size;
4343
4344  size = 0;
4345
4346  while ((fragP->fr_fix + size) % fragP->fr_offset)
4347    size++;
4348
4349  return size;
4350}
4351
4352#ifdef OBJ_ELF
4353# ifdef WARN_COMMENTS
4354const char *md_shortopts = "Vc";
4355# else
4356const char *md_shortopts = "V";
4357# endif
4358#else
4359# ifdef WARN_COMMENTS
4360const char *md_shortopts = "c";
4361# else
4362const char *md_shortopts = "";
4363# endif
4364#endif
4365
4366struct option md_longopts[] = {
4367#ifdef WARN_COMMENTS
4368  {"warn-comment", no_argument, NULL, 'c'},
4369#endif
4370  {NULL, no_argument, NULL, 0}
4371};
4372size_t md_longopts_size = sizeof (md_longopts);
4373
4374int
4375md_parse_option (c, arg)
4376     int c ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4377     char *arg ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4378{
4379  switch (c)
4380    {
4381    default:
4382      return 0;
4383
4384#ifdef OBJ_ELF
4385    case 'V':
4386      print_version_id ();
4387      break;
4388#endif
4389#ifdef WARN_COMMENTS
4390    case 'c':
4391      warn_comment = 1;
4392      break;
4393#endif
4394    }
4395
4396  return 1;
4397}
4398
4399void
4400md_show_usage (stream)
4401     FILE *stream ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4402{
4403#ifdef OBJ_ELF
4404  fprintf (stream, _("\
4405  -Q                      ignored\n"));
4406#endif
4407#ifdef WARN_COMMENTS
4408  fprintf (stream, _("\
4409  -c                      print a warning if a comment is found\n"));
4410#endif
4411}
4412
4413/* We have no need to default values of symbols.  */
4414
4415symbolS *
4416md_undefined_symbol (name)
4417     char *name ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4418{
4419  return 0;
4420}
4421
4422#if defined (OBJ_SOM) || defined (ELF_ARG_RELOC)
4423#define nonzero_dibits(x) \
4424  ((x) | (((x) & 0x55555555) << 1) | (((x) & 0xAAAAAAAA) >> 1))
4425#define arg_reloc_stub_needed(CALLER, CALLEE) \
4426  (((CALLER) ^ (CALLEE)) & nonzero_dibits (CALLER) & nonzero_dibits (CALLEE))
4427#else
4428#define arg_reloc_stub_needed(CALLER, CALLEE) 0
4429#endif
4430
4431/* Apply a fixup to an instruction.  */
4432
4433void
4434md_apply_fix (fixP, valP, seg)
4435     fixS *fixP;
4436     valueT *valP;
4437     segT seg ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4438{
4439  char *fixpos;
4440  struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fixP;
4441  offsetT new_val;
4442  int insn, val, fmt;
4443
4444  /* SOM uses R_HPPA_ENTRY and R_HPPA_EXIT relocations which can
4445     never be "applied" (they are just markers).  Likewise for
4446     R_HPPA_BEGIN_BRTAB and R_HPPA_END_BRTAB.  */
4447#ifdef OBJ_SOM
4448  if (fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_ENTRY
4449      || fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_EXIT
4450      || fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_BEGIN_BRTAB
4451      || fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_END_BRTAB
4452      || fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_BEGIN_TRY)
4453    return;
4454
4455  /* Disgusting.  We must set fx_offset ourselves -- R_HPPA_END_TRY
4456     fixups are considered not adjustable, which in turn causes
4457     adjust_reloc_syms to not set fx_offset.  Ugh.  */
4458  if (fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_END_TRY)
4459    {
4460      fixP->fx_offset = * valP;
4461      return;
4462    }
4463#endif
4464#ifdef OBJ_ELF
4465  if (fixP->fx_r_type == (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY
4466      || fixP->fx_r_type == (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT)
4467    return;
4468#endif
4469
4470  if (fixP->fx_addsy == NULL && fixP->fx_pcrel == 0)
4471    fixP->fx_done = 1;
4472
4473  /* There should be a HPPA specific fixup associated with the GAS fixup.  */
4474  hppa_fixP = (struct hppa_fix_struct *) fixP->tc_fix_data;
4475  if (hppa_fixP == NULL)
4476    {
4477      as_bad_where (fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line,
4478		    _("no hppa_fixup entry for fixup type 0x%x"),
4479		    fixP->fx_r_type);
4480      return;
4481    }
4482
4483  fixpos = fixP->fx_frag->fr_literal + fixP->fx_where;
4484
4485  if (fixP->fx_size != 4 || hppa_fixP->fx_r_format == 32)
4486    {
4487      /* Handle constant output. */
4488      number_to_chars_bigendian (fixpos, *valP, fixP->fx_size);
4489      return;
4490    }
4491
4492  insn = bfd_get_32 (stdoutput, fixpos);
4493  fmt = bfd_hppa_insn2fmt (stdoutput, insn);
4494
4495  /* If there is a symbol associated with this fixup, then it's something
4496     which will need a SOM relocation (except for some PC-relative relocs).
4497     In such cases we should treat the "val" or "addend" as zero since it
4498     will be added in as needed from fx_offset in tc_gen_reloc.  */
4499  if ((fixP->fx_addsy != NULL
4500       || fixP->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_NONE)
4501#ifdef OBJ_SOM
4502      && fmt != 32
4503#endif
4504      )
4505    new_val = ((fmt == 12 || fmt == 17 || fmt == 22) ? 8 : 0);
4506#ifdef OBJ_SOM
4507  /* These field selectors imply that we do not want an addend.  */
4508  else if (hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_psel
4509	   || hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_rpsel
4510	   || hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_lpsel
4511	   || hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_tsel
4512	   || hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_rtsel
4513	   || hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_ltsel)
4514    new_val = ((fmt == 12 || fmt == 17 || fmt == 22) ? 8 : 0);
4515#endif
4516  else
4517    new_val = hppa_field_adjust (* valP, 0, hppa_fixP->fx_r_field);
4518
4519  /* Handle pc-relative exceptions from above.  */
4520  if ((fmt == 12 || fmt == 17 || fmt == 22)
4521      && fixP->fx_addsy
4522      && fixP->fx_pcrel
4523      && !arg_reloc_stub_needed (symbol_arg_reloc_info (fixP->fx_addsy),
4524				 hppa_fixP->fx_arg_reloc)
4525#ifdef OBJ_ELF
4526      && (* valP - 8 + 8192 < 16384
4527	  || (fmt == 17 && * valP - 8 + 262144 < 524288)
4528	  || (fmt == 22 && * valP - 8 + 8388608 < 16777216))
4529#endif
4530#ifdef OBJ_SOM
4531      && (* valP - 8 + 262144 < 524288
4532	  || (fmt == 22 && * valP - 8 + 8388608 < 16777216))
4533#endif
4534      && !S_IS_EXTERNAL (fixP->fx_addsy)
4535      && !S_IS_WEAK (fixP->fx_addsy)
4536      && S_GET_SEGMENT (fixP->fx_addsy) == hppa_fixP->segment
4537      && !(fixP->fx_subsy
4538	   && S_GET_SEGMENT (fixP->fx_subsy) != hppa_fixP->segment))
4539    {
4540      new_val = hppa_field_adjust (* valP, 0, hppa_fixP->fx_r_field);
4541    }
4542
4543  switch (fmt)
4544    {
4545    case 10:
4546      CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val, 8191, -8192,
4547			 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
4548      val = new_val;
4549
4550      insn = (insn & ~ 0x3ff1) | (((val & 0x1ff8) << 1)
4551				  | ((val & 0x2000) >> 13));
4552      break;
4553    case -11:
4554      CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val, 8191, -8192,
4555			 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
4556      val = new_val;
4557
4558      insn = (insn & ~ 0x3ff9) | (((val & 0x1ffc) << 1)
4559				  | ((val & 0x2000) >> 13));
4560      break;
4561      /* Handle all opcodes with the 'j' operand type.  */
4562    case 14:
4563      CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val, 8191, -8192,
4564			 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
4565      val = new_val;
4566
4567      insn = ((insn & ~ 0x3fff) | low_sign_unext (val, 14));
4568      break;
4569
4570      /* Handle all opcodes with the 'k' operand type.  */
4571    case 21:
4572      CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val, 1048575, -1048576,
4573			 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
4574      val = new_val;
4575
4576      insn = (insn & ~ 0x1fffff) | re_assemble_21 (val);
4577      break;
4578
4579      /* Handle all the opcodes with the 'i' operand type.  */
4580    case 11:
4581      CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val, 1023, -1024,
4582			 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
4583      val = new_val;
4584
4585      insn = (insn & ~ 0x7ff) | low_sign_unext (val, 11);
4586      break;
4587
4588      /* Handle all the opcodes with the 'w' operand type.  */
4589    case 12:
4590      CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val - 8, 8191, -8192,
4591			 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
4592      val = new_val - 8;
4593
4594      insn = (insn & ~ 0x1ffd) | re_assemble_12 (val >> 2);
4595      break;
4596
4597      /* Handle some of the opcodes with the 'W' operand type.  */
4598    case 17:
4599      {
4600	offsetT distance = * valP;
4601
4602	/* If this is an absolute branch (ie no link) with an out of
4603	   range target, then we want to complain.  */
4604	if (fixP->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL
4605	    && (insn & 0xffe00000) == 0xe8000000)
4606	  CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (distance - 8, 262143, -262144,
4607			     fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
4608
4609	CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val - 8, 262143, -262144,
4610			   fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
4611	val = new_val - 8;
4612
4613	insn = (insn & ~ 0x1f1ffd) | re_assemble_17 (val >> 2);
4614	break;
4615      }
4616
4617    case 22:
4618      {
4619	offsetT distance = * valP;
4620
4621	/* If this is an absolute branch (ie no link) with an out of
4622	   range target, then we want to complain.  */
4623	if (fixP->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL
4624	    && (insn & 0xffe00000) == 0xe8000000)
4625	  CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (distance - 8, 8388607, -8388608,
4626			     fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
4627
4628	CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val - 8, 8388607, -8388608,
4629			   fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
4630	val = new_val - 8;
4631
4632	insn = (insn & ~ 0x3ff1ffd) | re_assemble_22 (val >> 2);
4633	break;
4634      }
4635
4636    case -10:
4637      val = new_val;
4638      insn = (insn & ~ 0xfff1) | re_assemble_16 (val & -8);
4639      break;
4640
4641    case -16:
4642      val = new_val;
4643      insn = (insn & ~ 0xfff9) | re_assemble_16 (val & -4);
4644      break;
4645
4646    case 16:
4647      val = new_val;
4648      insn = (insn & ~ 0xffff) | re_assemble_16 (val);
4649      break;
4650
4651    case 32:
4652      insn = new_val;
4653      break;
4654
4655    default:
4656      as_bad_where (fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line,
4657		    _("Unknown relocation encountered in md_apply_fix."));
4658      return;
4659    }
4660
4661  /* Insert the relocation.  */
4662  bfd_put_32 (stdoutput, insn, fixpos);
4663}
4664
4665/* Exactly what point is a PC-relative offset relative TO?
4666   On the PA, they're relative to the address of the offset.  */
4667
4668long
4669md_pcrel_from (fixP)
4670     fixS *fixP;
4671{
4672  return fixP->fx_where + fixP->fx_frag->fr_address;
4673}
4674
4675/* Return nonzero if the input line pointer is at the end of
4676   a statement.  */
4677
4678static int
4679is_end_of_statement ()
4680{
4681  return ((*input_line_pointer == '\n')
4682	  || (*input_line_pointer == ';')
4683	  || (*input_line_pointer == '!'));
4684}
4685
4686/* Read a number from S.  The number might come in one of many forms,
4687   the most common will be a hex or decimal constant, but it could be
4688   a pre-defined register (Yuk!), or an absolute symbol.
4689
4690   Return 1 on success or 0 on failure.  If STRICT, then a missing
4691   register prefix will cause a failure.  The number itself is
4692   returned in `pa_number'.
4693
4694   IS_FLOAT indicates that a PA-89 FP register number should be
4695   parsed;  A `l' or `r' suffix is checked for if but 2 of IS_FLOAT is
4696   not set.
4697
4698   pa_parse_number can not handle negative constants and will fail
4699   horribly if it is passed such a constant.  */
4700
4701static int
4702pa_parse_number (s, is_float)
4703     char **s;
4704     int is_float;
4705{
4706  int num;
4707  char *name;
4708  char c;
4709  symbolS *sym;
4710  int status;
4711  char *p = *s;
4712  bfd_boolean have_prefix;
4713
4714  /* Skip whitespace before the number.  */
4715  while (*p == ' ' || *p == '\t')
4716    p = p + 1;
4717
4718  pa_number = -1;
4719  have_prefix = 0;
4720  num = 0;
4721  if (!strict && ISDIGIT (*p))
4722    {
4723      /* Looks like a number.  */
4724
4725      if (*p == '0' && (*(p + 1) == 'x' || *(p + 1) == 'X'))
4726	{
4727	  /* The number is specified in hex.  */
4728	  p += 2;
4729	  while (ISDIGIT (*p) || ((*p >= 'a') && (*p <= 'f'))
4730		 || ((*p >= 'A') && (*p <= 'F')))
4731	    {
4732	      if (ISDIGIT (*p))
4733		num = num * 16 + *p - '0';
4734	      else if (*p >= 'a' && *p <= 'f')
4735		num = num * 16 + *p - 'a' + 10;
4736	      else
4737		num = num * 16 + *p - 'A' + 10;
4738	      ++p;
4739	    }
4740	}
4741      else
4742	{
4743	  /* The number is specified in decimal.  */
4744	  while (ISDIGIT (*p))
4745	    {
4746	      num = num * 10 + *p - '0';
4747	      ++p;
4748	    }
4749	}
4750
4751      pa_number = num;
4752
4753      /* Check for a `l' or `r' suffix.  */
4754      if (is_float)
4755	{
4756	  pa_number += FP_REG_BASE;
4757	  if (! (is_float & 2))
4758	    {
4759	      if (IS_R_SELECT (p))
4760		{
4761		  pa_number += FP_REG_RSEL;
4762		  ++p;
4763		}
4764	      else if (IS_L_SELECT (p))
4765		{
4766		  ++p;
4767		}
4768	    }
4769	}
4770    }
4771  else if (*p == '%')
4772    {
4773      /* The number might be a predefined register.  */
4774      have_prefix = 1;
4775      name = p;
4776      p++;
4777      c = *p;
4778      /* Tege hack: Special case for general registers as the general
4779         code makes a binary search with case translation, and is VERY
4780         slow.  */
4781      if (c == 'r')
4782	{
4783	  p++;
4784	  if (*p == 'e' && *(p + 1) == 't'
4785	      && (*(p + 2) == '0' || *(p + 2) == '1'))
4786	    {
4787	      p += 2;
4788	      num = *p - '0' + 28;
4789	      p++;
4790	    }
4791	  else if (*p == 'p')
4792	    {
4793	      num = 2;
4794	      p++;
4795	    }
4796	  else if (!ISDIGIT (*p))
4797	    {
4798	      if (print_errors)
4799		as_bad (_("Undefined register: '%s'."), name);
4800	      num = -1;
4801	    }
4802	  else
4803	    {
4804	      do
4805		num = num * 10 + *p++ - '0';
4806	      while (ISDIGIT (*p));
4807	    }
4808	}
4809      else
4810	{
4811	  /* Do a normal register search.  */
4812	  while (is_part_of_name (c))
4813	    {
4814	      p = p + 1;
4815	      c = *p;
4816	    }
4817	  *p = 0;
4818	  status = reg_name_search (name);
4819	  if (status >= 0)
4820	    num = status;
4821	  else
4822	    {
4823	      if (print_errors)
4824		as_bad (_("Undefined register: '%s'."), name);
4825	      num = -1;
4826	    }
4827	  *p = c;
4828	}
4829
4830      pa_number = num;
4831    }
4832  else
4833    {
4834      /* And finally, it could be a symbol in the absolute section which
4835         is effectively a constant, or a register alias symbol.  */
4836      name = p;
4837      c = *p;
4838      while (is_part_of_name (c))
4839	{
4840	  p = p + 1;
4841	  c = *p;
4842	}
4843      *p = 0;
4844      if ((sym = symbol_find (name)) != NULL)
4845	{
4846	  if (S_GET_SEGMENT (sym) == reg_section)
4847	    {
4848	      num = S_GET_VALUE (sym);
4849	      /* Well, we don't really have one, but we do have a
4850		 register, so...  */
4851	      have_prefix = TRUE;
4852	    }
4853	  else if (S_GET_SEGMENT (sym) == &bfd_abs_section)
4854	    num = S_GET_VALUE (sym);
4855	  else if (!strict)
4856	    {
4857	      if (print_errors)
4858		as_bad (_("Non-absolute symbol: '%s'."), name);
4859	      num = -1;
4860	    }
4861	}
4862      else if (!strict)
4863	{
4864	  /* There is where we'd come for an undefined symbol
4865	     or for an empty string.  For an empty string we
4866	     will return zero.  That's a concession made for
4867	     compatibility with the braindamaged HP assemblers.  */
4868	  if (*name == 0)
4869	    num = 0;
4870	  else
4871	    {
4872	      if (print_errors)
4873		as_bad (_("Undefined absolute constant: '%s'."), name);
4874	      num = -1;
4875	    }
4876	}
4877      *p = c;
4878
4879      pa_number = num;
4880    }
4881
4882  if (!strict || have_prefix)
4883    {
4884      *s = p;
4885      return 1;
4886    }
4887  return 0;
4888}
4889
4890#define REG_NAME_CNT	(sizeof (pre_defined_registers) / sizeof (struct pd_reg))
4891
4892/* Given NAME, find the register number associated with that name, return
4893   the integer value associated with the given name or -1 on failure.  */
4894
4895static int
4896reg_name_search (name)
4897     char *name;
4898{
4899  int middle, low, high;
4900  int cmp;
4901
4902  low = 0;
4903  high = REG_NAME_CNT - 1;
4904
4905  do
4906    {
4907      middle = (low + high) / 2;
4908      cmp = strcasecmp (name, pre_defined_registers[middle].name);
4909      if (cmp < 0)
4910	high = middle - 1;
4911      else if (cmp > 0)
4912	low = middle + 1;
4913      else
4914	return pre_defined_registers[middle].value;
4915    }
4916  while (low <= high);
4917
4918  return -1;
4919}
4920
4921/* Return nonzero if the given INSN and L/R information will require
4922   a new PA-1.1 opcode.  */
4923
4924static int
4925need_pa11_opcode ()
4926{
4927  if ((pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL) != 0
4928      && !(the_insn.fpof1 == DBL && the_insn.fpof2 == DBL))
4929    {
4930      /* If this instruction is specific to a particular architecture,
4931	 then set a new architecture.  */
4932      if (bfd_get_mach (stdoutput) < pa11)
4933	{
4934	  if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, pa11))
4935	    as_warn (_("could not update architecture and machine"));
4936	}
4937      return TRUE;
4938    }
4939  else
4940    return FALSE;
4941}
4942
4943/* Parse a condition for a fcmp instruction.  Return the numerical
4944   code associated with the condition.  */
4945
4946static int
4947pa_parse_fp_cmp_cond (s)
4948     char **s;
4949{
4950  int cond, i;
4951
4952  cond = 0;
4953
4954  for (i = 0; i < 32; i++)
4955    {
4956      if (strncasecmp (*s, fp_cond_map[i].string,
4957		       strlen (fp_cond_map[i].string)) == 0)
4958	{
4959	  cond = fp_cond_map[i].cond;
4960	  *s += strlen (fp_cond_map[i].string);
4961	  /* If not a complete match, back up the input string and
4962	     report an error.  */
4963	  if (**s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
4964	    {
4965	      *s -= strlen (fp_cond_map[i].string);
4966	      break;
4967	    }
4968	  while (**s == ' ' || **s == '\t')
4969	    *s = *s + 1;
4970	  return cond;
4971	}
4972    }
4973
4974  as_bad (_("Invalid FP Compare Condition: %s"), *s);
4975
4976  /* Advance over the bogus completer.  */
4977  while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
4978    *s += 1;
4979
4980  return 0;
4981}
4982
4983/* Parse a graphics test complete for ftest.  */
4984
4985static int
4986pa_parse_ftest_gfx_completer (s)
4987     char **s;
4988{
4989  int value;
4990
4991  value = 0;
4992  if (strncasecmp (*s, "acc8", 4) == 0)
4993    {
4994      value = 5;
4995      *s += 4;
4996    }
4997  else if (strncasecmp (*s, "acc6", 4) == 0)
4998    {
4999      value = 9;
5000      *s += 4;
5001    }
5002  else if (strncasecmp (*s, "acc4", 4) == 0)
5003    {
5004      value = 13;
5005      *s += 4;
5006    }
5007  else if (strncasecmp (*s, "acc2", 4) == 0)
5008    {
5009      value = 17;
5010      *s += 4;
5011    }
5012  else if (strncasecmp (*s, "acc", 3) == 0)
5013    {
5014      value = 1;
5015      *s += 3;
5016    }
5017  else if (strncasecmp (*s, "rej8", 4) == 0)
5018    {
5019      value = 6;
5020      *s += 4;
5021    }
5022  else if (strncasecmp (*s, "rej", 3) == 0)
5023    {
5024      value = 2;
5025      *s += 3;
5026    }
5027  else
5028    {
5029      value = 0;
5030      as_bad (_("Invalid FTEST completer: %s"), *s);
5031    }
5032
5033  return value;
5034}
5035
5036/* Parse an FP operand format completer returning the completer
5037   type.  */
5038
5039static fp_operand_format
5040pa_parse_fp_cnv_format (s)
5041     char **s;
5042{
5043  int format;
5044
5045  format = SGL;
5046  if (**s == ',')
5047    {
5048      *s += 1;
5049      if (strncasecmp (*s, "sgl", 3) == 0)
5050	{
5051	  format = SGL;
5052	  *s += 4;
5053	}
5054      else if (strncasecmp (*s, "dbl", 3) == 0)
5055	{
5056	  format = DBL;
5057	  *s += 4;
5058	}
5059      else if (strncasecmp (*s, "quad", 4) == 0)
5060	{
5061	  format = QUAD;
5062	  *s += 5;
5063	}
5064      else if (strncasecmp (*s, "w", 1) == 0)
5065	{
5066	  format = W;
5067	  *s += 2;
5068	}
5069      else if (strncasecmp (*s, "uw", 2) == 0)
5070	{
5071	  format = UW;
5072	  *s += 3;
5073	}
5074      else if (strncasecmp (*s, "dw", 2) == 0)
5075	{
5076	  format = DW;
5077	  *s += 3;
5078	}
5079      else if (strncasecmp (*s, "udw", 3) == 0)
5080	{
5081	  format = UDW;
5082	  *s += 4;
5083	}
5084      else if (strncasecmp (*s, "qw", 2) == 0)
5085	{
5086	  format = QW;
5087	  *s += 3;
5088	}
5089      else if (strncasecmp (*s, "uqw", 3) == 0)
5090	{
5091	  format = UQW;
5092	  *s += 4;
5093	}
5094      else
5095	{
5096	  format = ILLEGAL_FMT;
5097	  as_bad (_("Invalid FP Operand Format: %3s"), *s);
5098	}
5099    }
5100
5101  return format;
5102}
5103
5104/* Parse an FP operand format completer returning the completer
5105   type.  */
5106
5107static fp_operand_format
5108pa_parse_fp_format (s)
5109     char **s;
5110{
5111  int format;
5112
5113  format = SGL;
5114  if (**s == ',')
5115    {
5116      *s += 1;
5117      if (strncasecmp (*s, "sgl", 3) == 0)
5118	{
5119	  format = SGL;
5120	  *s += 4;
5121	}
5122      else if (strncasecmp (*s, "dbl", 3) == 0)
5123	{
5124	  format = DBL;
5125	  *s += 4;
5126	}
5127      else if (strncasecmp (*s, "quad", 4) == 0)
5128	{
5129	  format = QUAD;
5130	  *s += 5;
5131	}
5132      else
5133	{
5134	  format = ILLEGAL_FMT;
5135	  as_bad (_("Invalid FP Operand Format: %3s"), *s);
5136	}
5137    }
5138
5139  return format;
5140}
5141
5142/* Convert from a selector string into a selector type.  */
5143
5144static int
5145pa_chk_field_selector (str)
5146     char **str;
5147{
5148  int middle, low, high;
5149  int cmp;
5150  char name[4];
5151
5152  /* Read past any whitespace.  */
5153  /* FIXME: should we read past newlines and formfeeds??? */
5154  while (**str == ' ' || **str == '\t' || **str == '\n' || **str == '\f')
5155    *str = *str + 1;
5156
5157  if ((*str)[1] == '\'' || (*str)[1] == '%')
5158    name[0] = TOLOWER ((*str)[0]),
5159    name[1] = 0;
5160  else if ((*str)[2] == '\'' || (*str)[2] == '%')
5161    name[0] = TOLOWER ((*str)[0]),
5162    name[1] = TOLOWER ((*str)[1]),
5163    name[2] = 0;
5164  else if ((*str)[3] == '\'' || (*str)[3] == '%')
5165    name[0] = TOLOWER ((*str)[0]),
5166    name[1] = TOLOWER ((*str)[1]),
5167    name[2] = TOLOWER ((*str)[2]),
5168    name[3] = 0;
5169  else
5170    return e_fsel;
5171
5172  low = 0;
5173  high = sizeof (selector_table) / sizeof (struct selector_entry) - 1;
5174
5175  do
5176    {
5177      middle = (low + high) / 2;
5178      cmp = strcmp (name, selector_table[middle].prefix);
5179      if (cmp < 0)
5180	high = middle - 1;
5181      else if (cmp > 0)
5182	low = middle + 1;
5183      else
5184	{
5185	  *str += strlen (name) + 1;
5186#ifndef OBJ_SOM
5187	  if (selector_table[middle].field_selector == e_nsel)
5188	    return e_fsel;
5189#endif
5190	  return selector_table[middle].field_selector;
5191	}
5192    }
5193  while (low <= high);
5194
5195  return e_fsel;
5196}
5197
5198/* Mark (via expr_end) the end of an expression (I think).  FIXME.  */
5199
5200static int
5201get_expression (str)
5202     char *str;
5203{
5204  char *save_in;
5205  asection *seg;
5206
5207  save_in = input_line_pointer;
5208  input_line_pointer = str;
5209  seg = expression (&the_insn.exp);
5210  if (!(seg == absolute_section
5211	|| seg == undefined_section
5212	|| SEG_NORMAL (seg)))
5213    {
5214      as_warn (_("Bad segment in expression."));
5215      expr_end = input_line_pointer;
5216      input_line_pointer = save_in;
5217      return 1;
5218    }
5219  expr_end = input_line_pointer;
5220  input_line_pointer = save_in;
5221  return 0;
5222}
5223
5224/* Mark (via expr_end) the end of an absolute expression.  FIXME.  */
5225static int
5226pa_get_absolute_expression (insn, strp)
5227     struct pa_it *insn;
5228     char **strp;
5229{
5230  char *save_in;
5231
5232  insn->field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (strp);
5233  save_in = input_line_pointer;
5234  input_line_pointer = *strp;
5235  expression (&insn->exp);
5236  /* This is not perfect, but is a huge improvement over doing nothing.
5237
5238     The PA assembly syntax is ambiguous in a variety of ways.  Consider
5239     this string "4 %r5"  Is that the number 4 followed by the register
5240     r5, or is that 4 MOD r5?
5241
5242     If we get a modulo expression when looking for an absolute, we try
5243     again cutting off the input string at the first whitespace character.  */
5244  if (insn->exp.X_op == O_modulus)
5245    {
5246      char *s, c;
5247      int retval;
5248
5249      input_line_pointer = *strp;
5250      s = *strp;
5251      while (*s != ',' && *s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
5252	s++;
5253
5254      c = *s;
5255      *s = 0;
5256
5257      retval = pa_get_absolute_expression (insn, strp);
5258
5259      input_line_pointer = save_in;
5260      *s = c;
5261      return evaluate_absolute (insn);
5262    }
5263  /* When in strict mode we have a non-match, fix up the pointers
5264     and return to our caller.  */
5265  if (insn->exp.X_op != O_constant && strict)
5266    {
5267      expr_end = input_line_pointer;
5268      input_line_pointer = save_in;
5269      return 0;
5270    }
5271  if (insn->exp.X_op != O_constant)
5272    {
5273      as_bad (_("Bad segment (should be absolute)."));
5274      expr_end = input_line_pointer;
5275      input_line_pointer = save_in;
5276      return 0;
5277    }
5278  expr_end = input_line_pointer;
5279  input_line_pointer = save_in;
5280  return evaluate_absolute (insn);
5281}
5282
5283/* Evaluate an absolute expression EXP which may be modified by
5284   the selector FIELD_SELECTOR.  Return the value of the expression.  */
5285static int
5286evaluate_absolute (insn)
5287     struct pa_it *insn;
5288{
5289  offsetT value;
5290  expressionS exp;
5291  int field_selector = insn->field_selector;
5292
5293  exp = insn->exp;
5294  value = exp.X_add_number;
5295
5296  return hppa_field_adjust (0, value, field_selector);
5297}
5298
5299/* Given an argument location specification return the associated
5300   argument location number.  */
5301
5302static unsigned int
5303pa_build_arg_reloc (type_name)
5304     char *type_name;
5305{
5306
5307  if (strncasecmp (type_name, "no", 2) == 0)
5308    return 0;
5309  if (strncasecmp (type_name, "gr", 2) == 0)
5310    return 1;
5311  else if (strncasecmp (type_name, "fr", 2) == 0)
5312    return 2;
5313  else if (strncasecmp (type_name, "fu", 2) == 0)
5314    return 3;
5315  else
5316    as_bad (_("Invalid argument location: %s\n"), type_name);
5317
5318  return 0;
5319}
5320
5321/* Encode and return an argument relocation specification for
5322   the given register in the location specified by arg_reloc.  */
5323
5324static unsigned int
5325pa_align_arg_reloc (reg, arg_reloc)
5326     unsigned int reg;
5327     unsigned int arg_reloc;
5328{
5329  unsigned int new_reloc;
5330
5331  new_reloc = arg_reloc;
5332  switch (reg)
5333    {
5334    case 0:
5335      new_reloc <<= 8;
5336      break;
5337    case 1:
5338      new_reloc <<= 6;
5339      break;
5340    case 2:
5341      new_reloc <<= 4;
5342      break;
5343    case 3:
5344      new_reloc <<= 2;
5345      break;
5346    default:
5347      as_bad (_("Invalid argument description: %d"), reg);
5348    }
5349
5350  return new_reloc;
5351}
5352
5353/* Parse a PA nullification completer (,n).  Return nonzero if the
5354   completer was found; return zero if no completer was found.  */
5355
5356static int
5357pa_parse_nullif (s)
5358     char **s;
5359{
5360  int nullif;
5361
5362  nullif = 0;
5363  if (**s == ',')
5364    {
5365      *s = *s + 1;
5366      if (strncasecmp (*s, "n", 1) == 0)
5367	nullif = 1;
5368      else
5369	{
5370	  as_bad (_("Invalid Nullification: (%c)"), **s);
5371	  nullif = 0;
5372	}
5373      *s = *s + 1;
5374    }
5375
5376  return nullif;
5377}
5378
5379/* Parse a non-negated compare/subtract completer returning the
5380   number (for encoding in instructions) of the given completer.  */
5381
5382static int
5383pa_parse_nonneg_cmpsub_cmpltr (s)
5384     char **s;
5385{
5386  int cmpltr;
5387  char *name = *s + 1;
5388  char c;
5389  char *save_s = *s;
5390  int nullify = 0;
5391
5392  cmpltr = 0;
5393  if (**s == ',')
5394    {
5395      *s += 1;
5396      while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
5397	*s += 1;
5398      c = **s;
5399      **s = 0x00;
5400
5401      if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
5402	{
5403	  cmpltr = 1;
5404	}
5405      else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
5406	{
5407	  cmpltr = 2;
5408	}
5409      else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
5410	{
5411	  cmpltr = 3;
5412	}
5413      else if (strcmp (name, "<<") == 0)
5414	{
5415	  cmpltr = 4;
5416	}
5417      else if (strcmp (name, "<<=") == 0)
5418	{
5419	  cmpltr = 5;
5420	}
5421      else if (strcasecmp (name, "sv") == 0)
5422	{
5423	  cmpltr = 6;
5424	}
5425      else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
5426	{
5427	  cmpltr = 7;
5428	}
5429      /* If we have something like addb,n then there is no condition
5430         completer.  */
5431      else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0)
5432	{
5433	  cmpltr = 0;
5434	  nullify = 1;
5435	}
5436      else
5437	{
5438	  cmpltr = -1;
5439	}
5440      **s = c;
5441    }
5442
5443  /* Reset pointers if this was really a ,n for a branch instruction.  */
5444  if (nullify)
5445    *s = save_s;
5446
5447  return cmpltr;
5448}
5449
5450/* Parse a negated compare/subtract completer returning the
5451   number (for encoding in instructions) of the given completer.  */
5452
5453static int
5454pa_parse_neg_cmpsub_cmpltr (s)
5455     char **s;
5456{
5457  int cmpltr;
5458  char *name = *s + 1;
5459  char c;
5460  char *save_s = *s;
5461  int nullify = 0;
5462
5463  cmpltr = 0;
5464  if (**s == ',')
5465    {
5466      *s += 1;
5467      while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
5468	*s += 1;
5469      c = **s;
5470      **s = 0x00;
5471
5472      if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
5473	{
5474	  cmpltr = 0;
5475	}
5476      else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
5477	{
5478	  cmpltr = 1;
5479	}
5480      else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
5481	{
5482	  cmpltr = 2;
5483	}
5484      else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
5485	{
5486	  cmpltr = 3;
5487	}
5488      else if (strcmp (name, ">>=") == 0)
5489	{
5490	  cmpltr = 4;
5491	}
5492      else if (strcmp (name, ">>") == 0)
5493	{
5494	  cmpltr = 5;
5495	}
5496      else if (strcasecmp (name, "nsv") == 0)
5497	{
5498	  cmpltr = 6;
5499	}
5500      else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
5501	{
5502	  cmpltr = 7;
5503	}
5504      /* If we have something like addb,n then there is no condition
5505         completer.  */
5506      else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0)
5507	{
5508	  cmpltr = 0;
5509	  nullify = 1;
5510	}
5511      else
5512	{
5513	  cmpltr = -1;
5514	}
5515      **s = c;
5516    }
5517
5518  /* Reset pointers if this was really a ,n for a branch instruction.  */
5519  if (nullify)
5520    *s = save_s;
5521
5522  return cmpltr;
5523}
5524
5525/* Parse a 64 bit compare and branch completer returning the number (for
5526   encoding in instructions) of the given completer.
5527
5528   Nonnegated comparisons are returned as 0-7, negated comparisons are
5529   returned as 8-15.  */
5530
5531static int
5532pa_parse_cmpb_64_cmpltr (s)
5533     char **s;
5534{
5535  int cmpltr;
5536  char *name = *s + 1;
5537  char c;
5538
5539  cmpltr = -1;
5540  if (**s == ',')
5541    {
5542      *s += 1;
5543      while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
5544	*s += 1;
5545      c = **s;
5546      **s = 0x00;
5547
5548      if (strcmp (name, "*") == 0)
5549	{
5550	  cmpltr = 0;
5551	}
5552      else if (strcmp (name, "*=") == 0)
5553	{
5554	  cmpltr = 1;
5555	}
5556      else if (strcmp (name, "*<") == 0)
5557	{
5558	  cmpltr = 2;
5559	}
5560      else if (strcmp (name, "*<=") == 0)
5561	{
5562	  cmpltr = 3;
5563	}
5564      else if (strcmp (name, "*<<") == 0)
5565	{
5566	  cmpltr = 4;
5567	}
5568      else if (strcmp (name, "*<<=") == 0)
5569	{
5570	  cmpltr = 5;
5571	}
5572      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*sv") == 0)
5573	{
5574	  cmpltr = 6;
5575	}
5576      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*od") == 0)
5577	{
5578	  cmpltr = 7;
5579	}
5580      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*tr") == 0)
5581	{
5582	  cmpltr = 8;
5583	}
5584      else if (strcmp (name, "*<>") == 0)
5585	{
5586	  cmpltr = 9;
5587	}
5588      else if (strcmp (name, "*>=") == 0)
5589	{
5590	  cmpltr = 10;
5591	}
5592      else if (strcmp (name, "*>") == 0)
5593	{
5594	  cmpltr = 11;
5595	}
5596      else if (strcmp (name, "*>>=") == 0)
5597	{
5598	  cmpltr = 12;
5599	}
5600      else if (strcmp (name, "*>>") == 0)
5601	{
5602	  cmpltr = 13;
5603	}
5604      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*nsv") == 0)
5605	{
5606	  cmpltr = 14;
5607	}
5608      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*ev") == 0)
5609	{
5610	  cmpltr = 15;
5611	}
5612      else
5613	{
5614	  cmpltr = -1;
5615	}
5616      **s = c;
5617    }
5618
5619  return cmpltr;
5620}
5621
5622/* Parse a 64 bit compare immediate and branch completer returning the number
5623   (for encoding in instructions) of the given completer.  */
5624
5625static int
5626pa_parse_cmpib_64_cmpltr (s)
5627     char **s;
5628{
5629  int cmpltr;
5630  char *name = *s + 1;
5631  char c;
5632
5633  cmpltr = -1;
5634  if (**s == ',')
5635    {
5636      *s += 1;
5637      while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
5638	*s += 1;
5639      c = **s;
5640      **s = 0x00;
5641
5642      if (strcmp (name, "*<<") == 0)
5643	{
5644	  cmpltr = 0;
5645	}
5646      else if (strcmp (name, "*=") == 0)
5647	{
5648	  cmpltr = 1;
5649	}
5650      else if (strcmp (name, "*<") == 0)
5651	{
5652	  cmpltr = 2;
5653	}
5654      else if (strcmp (name, "*<=") == 0)
5655	{
5656	  cmpltr = 3;
5657	}
5658      else if (strcmp (name, "*>>=") == 0)
5659	{
5660	  cmpltr = 4;
5661	}
5662      else if (strcmp (name, "*<>") == 0)
5663	{
5664	  cmpltr = 5;
5665	}
5666      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*>=") == 0)
5667	{
5668	  cmpltr = 6;
5669	}
5670      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*>") == 0)
5671	{
5672	  cmpltr = 7;
5673	}
5674      else
5675	{
5676	  cmpltr = -1;
5677	}
5678      **s = c;
5679    }
5680
5681  return cmpltr;
5682}
5683
5684/* Parse a non-negated addition completer returning the number
5685   (for encoding in instructions) of the given completer.  */
5686
5687static int
5688pa_parse_nonneg_add_cmpltr (s)
5689     char **s;
5690{
5691  int cmpltr;
5692  char *name = *s + 1;
5693  char c;
5694  char *save_s = *s;
5695  int nullify = 0;
5696
5697  cmpltr = 0;
5698  if (**s == ',')
5699    {
5700      *s += 1;
5701      while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
5702	*s += 1;
5703      c = **s;
5704      **s = 0x00;
5705      if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
5706	{
5707	  cmpltr = 1;
5708	}
5709      else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
5710	{
5711	  cmpltr = 2;
5712	}
5713      else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
5714	{
5715	  cmpltr = 3;
5716	}
5717      else if (strcasecmp (name, "nuv") == 0)
5718	{
5719	  cmpltr = 4;
5720	}
5721      else if (strcasecmp (name, "znv") == 0)
5722	{
5723	  cmpltr = 5;
5724	}
5725      else if (strcasecmp (name, "sv") == 0)
5726	{
5727	  cmpltr = 6;
5728	}
5729      else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
5730	{
5731	  cmpltr = 7;
5732	}
5733      /* If we have something like addb,n then there is no condition
5734         completer.  */
5735      else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0)
5736	{
5737	  cmpltr = 0;
5738	  nullify = 1;
5739	}
5740      else
5741	{
5742	  cmpltr = -1;
5743	}
5744      **s = c;
5745    }
5746
5747  /* Reset pointers if this was really a ,n for a branch instruction.  */
5748  if (nullify)
5749    *s = save_s;
5750
5751  return cmpltr;
5752}
5753
5754/* Parse a negated addition completer returning the number
5755   (for encoding in instructions) of the given completer.  */
5756
5757static int
5758pa_parse_neg_add_cmpltr (s)
5759     char **s;
5760{
5761  int cmpltr;
5762  char *name = *s + 1;
5763  char c;
5764  char *save_s = *s;
5765  int nullify = 0;
5766
5767  cmpltr = 0;
5768  if (**s == ',')
5769    {
5770      *s += 1;
5771      while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
5772	*s += 1;
5773      c = **s;
5774      **s = 0x00;
5775      if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
5776	{
5777	  cmpltr = 0;
5778	}
5779      else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
5780	{
5781	  cmpltr = 1;
5782	}
5783      else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
5784	{
5785	  cmpltr = 2;
5786	}
5787      else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
5788	{
5789	  cmpltr = 3;
5790	}
5791      else if (strcasecmp (name, "uv") == 0)
5792	{
5793	  cmpltr = 4;
5794	}
5795      else if (strcasecmp (name, "vnz") == 0)
5796	{
5797	  cmpltr = 5;
5798	}
5799      else if (strcasecmp (name, "nsv") == 0)
5800	{
5801	  cmpltr = 6;
5802	}
5803      else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
5804	{
5805	  cmpltr = 7;
5806	}
5807      /* If we have something like addb,n then there is no condition
5808         completer.  */
5809      else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0)
5810	{
5811	  cmpltr = 0;
5812	  nullify = 1;
5813	}
5814      else
5815	{
5816	  cmpltr = -1;
5817	}
5818      **s = c;
5819    }
5820
5821  /* Reset pointers if this was really a ,n for a branch instruction.  */
5822  if (nullify)
5823    *s = save_s;
5824
5825  return cmpltr;
5826}
5827
5828/* Parse a 64 bit wide mode add and branch completer returning the number (for
5829   encoding in instructions) of the given completer.  */
5830
5831static int
5832pa_parse_addb_64_cmpltr (s)
5833     char **s;
5834{
5835  int cmpltr;
5836  char *name = *s + 1;
5837  char c;
5838  char *save_s = *s;
5839  int nullify = 0;
5840
5841  cmpltr = 0;
5842  if (**s == ',')
5843    {
5844      *s += 1;
5845      while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
5846	*s += 1;
5847      c = **s;
5848      **s = 0x00;
5849      if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
5850	{
5851	  cmpltr = 1;
5852	}
5853      else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
5854	{
5855	  cmpltr = 2;
5856	}
5857      else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
5858	{
5859	  cmpltr = 3;
5860	}
5861      else if (strcasecmp (name, "nuv") == 0)
5862	{
5863	  cmpltr = 4;
5864	}
5865      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*=") == 0)
5866	{
5867	  cmpltr = 5;
5868	}
5869      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*<") == 0)
5870	{
5871	  cmpltr = 6;
5872	}
5873      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*<=") == 0)
5874	{
5875	  cmpltr = 7;
5876	}
5877      else if (strcmp (name, "tr") == 0)
5878	{
5879	  cmpltr = 8;
5880	}
5881      else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
5882	{
5883	  cmpltr = 9;
5884	}
5885      else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
5886	{
5887	  cmpltr = 10;
5888	}
5889      else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
5890	{
5891	  cmpltr = 11;
5892	}
5893      else if (strcasecmp (name, "uv") == 0)
5894	{
5895	  cmpltr = 12;
5896	}
5897      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*<>") == 0)
5898	{
5899	  cmpltr = 13;
5900	}
5901      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*>=") == 0)
5902	{
5903	  cmpltr = 14;
5904	}
5905      else if (strcasecmp (name, "*>") == 0)
5906	{
5907	  cmpltr = 15;
5908	}
5909      /* If we have something like addb,n then there is no condition
5910         completer.  */
5911      else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0)
5912	{
5913	  cmpltr = 0;
5914	  nullify = 1;
5915	}
5916      else
5917	{
5918	  cmpltr = -1;
5919	}
5920      **s = c;
5921    }
5922
5923  /* Reset pointers if this was really a ,n for a branch instruction.  */
5924  if (nullify)
5925    *s = save_s;
5926
5927  return cmpltr;
5928}
5929
5930#ifdef OBJ_SOM
5931/* Handle an alignment directive.  Special so that we can update the
5932   alignment of the subspace if necessary.  */
5933static void
5934pa_align (bytes)
5935     int bytes;
5936{
5937  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
5938  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
5939
5940  /* Let the generic gas code do most of the work.  */
5941  s_align_bytes (bytes);
5942
5943  /* If bytes is a power of 2, then update the current subspace's
5944     alignment if necessary.  */
5945  if (exact_log2 (bytes) != -1)
5946    record_alignment (current_subspace->ssd_seg, exact_log2 (bytes));
5947}
5948#endif
5949
5950/* Handle a .BLOCK type pseudo-op.  */
5951
5952static void
5953pa_block (z)
5954     int z ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
5955{
5956  unsigned int temp_size;
5957
5958#ifdef OBJ_SOM
5959  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
5960  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
5961#endif
5962
5963  temp_size = get_absolute_expression ();
5964
5965  if (temp_size > 0x3FFFFFFF)
5966    {
5967      as_bad (_("Argument to .BLOCK/.BLOCKZ must be between 0 and 0x3fffffff"));
5968      temp_size = 0;
5969    }
5970  else
5971    {
5972      /* Always fill with zeros, that's what the HP assembler does.  */
5973      char *p = frag_var (rs_fill, 1, 1, 0, NULL, temp_size, NULL);
5974      *p = 0;
5975    }
5976
5977  pa_undefine_label ();
5978  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
5979}
5980
5981/* Handle a .begin_brtab and .end_brtab pseudo-op.  */
5982
5983static void
5984pa_brtab (begin)
5985     int begin ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
5986{
5987
5988#ifdef OBJ_SOM
5989  /* The BRTAB relocations are only available in SOM (to denote
5990     the beginning and end of branch tables).  */
5991  char *where = frag_more (0);
5992
5993  fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
5994		NULL, (offsetT) 0, NULL,
5995		0, begin ? R_HPPA_BEGIN_BRTAB : R_HPPA_END_BRTAB,
5996		e_fsel, 0, 0, 0);
5997#endif
5998
5999  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6000}
6001
6002/* Handle a .begin_try and .end_try pseudo-op.  */
6003
6004static void
6005pa_try (begin)
6006     int begin ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6007{
6008#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6009  expressionS exp;
6010  char *where = frag_more (0);
6011
6012  if (! begin)
6013    expression (&exp);
6014
6015  /* The TRY relocations are only available in SOM (to denote
6016     the beginning and end of exception handling regions).  */
6017
6018  fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
6019		NULL, (offsetT) 0, begin ? NULL : &exp,
6020		0, begin ? R_HPPA_BEGIN_TRY : R_HPPA_END_TRY,
6021		e_fsel, 0, 0, 0);
6022#endif
6023
6024  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6025}
6026
6027/* Handle a .CALL pseudo-op.  This involves storing away information
6028   about where arguments are to be found so the linker can detect
6029   (and correct) argument location mismatches between caller and callee.  */
6030
6031static void
6032pa_call (unused)
6033     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6034{
6035#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6036  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
6037  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6038#endif
6039
6040  pa_call_args (&last_call_desc);
6041  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6042}
6043
6044/* Do the dirty work of building a call descriptor which describes
6045   where the caller placed arguments to a function call.  */
6046
6047static void
6048pa_call_args (call_desc)
6049     struct call_desc *call_desc;
6050{
6051  char *name, c, *p;
6052  unsigned int temp, arg_reloc;
6053
6054  while (!is_end_of_statement ())
6055    {
6056      name = input_line_pointer;
6057      c = get_symbol_end ();
6058      /* Process a source argument.  */
6059      if ((strncasecmp (name, "argw", 4) == 0))
6060	{
6061	  temp = atoi (name + 4);
6062	  p = input_line_pointer;
6063	  *p = c;
6064	  input_line_pointer++;
6065	  name = input_line_pointer;
6066	  c = get_symbol_end ();
6067	  arg_reloc = pa_build_arg_reloc (name);
6068	  call_desc->arg_reloc |= pa_align_arg_reloc (temp, arg_reloc);
6069	}
6070      /* Process a return value.  */
6071      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "rtnval", 6) == 0))
6072	{
6073	  p = input_line_pointer;
6074	  *p = c;
6075	  input_line_pointer++;
6076	  name = input_line_pointer;
6077	  c = get_symbol_end ();
6078	  arg_reloc = pa_build_arg_reloc (name);
6079	  call_desc->arg_reloc |= (arg_reloc & 0x3);
6080	}
6081      else
6082	{
6083	  as_bad (_("Invalid .CALL argument: %s"), name);
6084	}
6085      p = input_line_pointer;
6086      *p = c;
6087      if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6088	input_line_pointer++;
6089    }
6090}
6091
6092/* Return TRUE if FRAG1 and FRAG2 are the same.  */
6093
6094static int
6095is_same_frag (frag1, frag2)
6096     fragS *frag1;
6097     fragS *frag2;
6098{
6099
6100  if (frag1 == NULL)
6101    return (FALSE);
6102  else if (frag2 == NULL)
6103    return (FALSE);
6104  else if (frag1 == frag2)
6105    return (TRUE);
6106  else if (frag2->fr_type == rs_fill && frag2->fr_fix == 0)
6107    return (is_same_frag (frag1, frag2->fr_next));
6108  else
6109    return (FALSE);
6110}
6111
6112#ifdef OBJ_ELF
6113/* Build an entry in the UNWIND subspace from the given function
6114   attributes in CALL_INFO.  This is not needed for SOM as using
6115   R_ENTRY and R_EXIT relocations allow the linker to handle building
6116   of the unwind spaces.  */
6117
6118static void
6119pa_build_unwind_subspace (call_info)
6120     struct call_info *call_info;
6121{
6122  asection *seg, *save_seg;
6123  subsegT save_subseg;
6124  unsigned int unwind;
6125  int reloc;
6126  char *p;
6127
6128  if ((bfd_get_section_flags (stdoutput, now_seg)
6129       & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD | SEC_READONLY))
6130      != (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD | SEC_READONLY))
6131    return;
6132
6133  reloc = R_PARISC_SEGREL32;
6134  save_seg = now_seg;
6135  save_subseg = now_subseg;
6136  /* Get into the right seg/subseg.  This may involve creating
6137     the seg the first time through.  Make sure to have the
6138     old seg/subseg so that we can reset things when we are done.  */
6139  seg = bfd_get_section_by_name (stdoutput, UNWIND_SECTION_NAME);
6140  if (seg == ASEC_NULL)
6141    {
6142      seg = subseg_new (UNWIND_SECTION_NAME, 0);
6143      bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, seg,
6144			     SEC_READONLY | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS
6145			     | SEC_LOAD | SEC_RELOC | SEC_ALLOC | SEC_DATA);
6146      bfd_set_section_alignment (stdoutput, seg, 2);
6147    }
6148
6149  subseg_set (seg, 0);
6150
6151  /* Get some space to hold relocation information for the unwind
6152     descriptor.  */
6153  p = frag_more (16);
6154
6155  /* Relocation info. for start offset of the function.  */
6156  md_number_to_chars (p, 0, 4);
6157  fix_new_hppa (frag_now, p - frag_now->fr_literal, 4,
6158		call_info->start_symbol, (offsetT) 0,
6159		(expressionS *) NULL, 0, reloc,
6160		e_fsel, 32, 0, 0);
6161
6162  /* Relocation info. for end offset of the function.
6163
6164     Because we allow reductions of 32bit relocations for ELF, this will be
6165     reduced to section_sym + offset which avoids putting the temporary
6166     symbol into the symbol table.  It (should) end up giving the same
6167     value as call_info->start_symbol + function size once the linker is
6168     finished with its work.  */
6169  md_number_to_chars (p + 4, 0, 4);
6170  fix_new_hppa (frag_now, p + 4 - frag_now->fr_literal, 4,
6171		call_info->end_symbol, (offsetT) 0,
6172		(expressionS *) NULL, 0, reloc,
6173		e_fsel, 32, 0, 0);
6174
6175  /* Dump the descriptor.  */
6176  unwind = UNWIND_LOW32 (&call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor);
6177  md_number_to_chars (p + 8, unwind, 4);
6178
6179  unwind = UNWIND_HIGH32 (&call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor);
6180  md_number_to_chars (p + 12, unwind, 4);
6181
6182  /* Return back to the original segment/subsegment.  */
6183  subseg_set (save_seg, save_subseg);
6184}
6185#endif
6186
6187/* Process a .CALLINFO pseudo-op.  This information is used later
6188   to build unwind descriptors and maybe one day to support
6189   .ENTER and .LEAVE.  */
6190
6191static void
6192pa_callinfo (unused)
6193     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6194{
6195  char *name, c, *p;
6196  int temp;
6197
6198#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6199  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
6200  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6201#endif
6202
6203  /* .CALLINFO must appear within a procedure definition.  */
6204  if (!within_procedure)
6205    as_bad (_(".callinfo is not within a procedure definition"));
6206
6207  /* Mark the fact that we found the .CALLINFO for the
6208     current procedure.  */
6209  callinfo_found = TRUE;
6210
6211  /* Iterate over the .CALLINFO arguments.  */
6212  while (!is_end_of_statement ())
6213    {
6214      name = input_line_pointer;
6215      c = get_symbol_end ();
6216      /* Frame size specification.  */
6217      if ((strncasecmp (name, "frame", 5) == 0))
6218	{
6219	  p = input_line_pointer;
6220	  *p = c;
6221	  input_line_pointer++;
6222	  temp = get_absolute_expression ();
6223	  if ((temp & 0x3) != 0)
6224	    {
6225	      as_bad (_("FRAME parameter must be a multiple of 8: %d\n"), temp);
6226	      temp = 0;
6227	    }
6228
6229	  /* callinfo is in bytes and unwind_desc is in 8 byte units.  */
6230	  last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.frame_size = temp / 8;
6231
6232	}
6233      /* Entry register (GR, GR and SR) specifications.  */
6234      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "entry_gr", 8) == 0))
6235	{
6236	  p = input_line_pointer;
6237	  *p = c;
6238	  input_line_pointer++;
6239	  temp = get_absolute_expression ();
6240	  /* The HP assembler accepts 19 as the high bound for ENTRY_GR
6241	     even though %r19 is caller saved.  I think this is a bug in
6242	     the HP assembler, and we are not going to emulate it.  */
6243	  if (temp < 3 || temp > 18)
6244	    as_bad (_("Value for ENTRY_GR must be in the range 3..18\n"));
6245	  last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.entry_gr = temp - 2;
6246	}
6247      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "entry_fr", 8) == 0))
6248	{
6249	  p = input_line_pointer;
6250	  *p = c;
6251	  input_line_pointer++;
6252	  temp = get_absolute_expression ();
6253	  /* Similarly the HP assembler takes 31 as the high bound even
6254	     though %fr21 is the last callee saved floating point register.  */
6255	  if (temp < 12 || temp > 21)
6256	    as_bad (_("Value for ENTRY_FR must be in the range 12..21\n"));
6257	  last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.entry_fr = temp - 11;
6258	}
6259      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "entry_sr", 8) == 0))
6260	{
6261	  p = input_line_pointer;
6262	  *p = c;
6263	  input_line_pointer++;
6264	  temp = get_absolute_expression ();
6265	  if (temp != 3)
6266	    as_bad (_("Value for ENTRY_SR must be 3\n"));
6267	}
6268      /* Note whether or not this function performs any calls.  */
6269      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "calls", 5) == 0) ||
6270	       (strncasecmp (name, "caller", 6) == 0))
6271	{
6272	  p = input_line_pointer;
6273	  *p = c;
6274	}
6275      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "no_calls", 8) == 0))
6276	{
6277	  p = input_line_pointer;
6278	  *p = c;
6279	}
6280      /* Should RP be saved into the stack.  */
6281      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "save_rp", 7) == 0))
6282	{
6283	  p = input_line_pointer;
6284	  *p = c;
6285	  last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.save_rp = 1;
6286	}
6287      /* Likewise for SP.  */
6288      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "save_sp", 7) == 0))
6289	{
6290	  p = input_line_pointer;
6291	  *p = c;
6292	  last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.save_sp = 1;
6293	}
6294      /* Is this an unwindable procedure.  If so mark it so
6295         in the unwind descriptor.  */
6296      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "no_unwind", 9) == 0))
6297	{
6298	  p = input_line_pointer;
6299	  *p = c;
6300	  last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.cannot_unwind = 1;
6301	}
6302      /* Is this an interrupt routine.  If so mark it in the
6303         unwind descriptor.  */
6304      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "hpux_int", 7) == 0))
6305	{
6306	  p = input_line_pointer;
6307	  *p = c;
6308	  last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.hpux_interrupt_marker = 1;
6309	}
6310      /* Is this a millicode routine.  "millicode" isn't in my
6311	 assembler manual, but my copy is old.  The HP assembler
6312	 accepts it, and there's a place in the unwind descriptor
6313	 to drop the information, so we'll accept it too.  */
6314      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "millicode", 9) == 0))
6315	{
6316	  p = input_line_pointer;
6317	  *p = c;
6318	  last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.millicode = 1;
6319	}
6320      else
6321	{
6322	  as_bad (_("Invalid .CALLINFO argument: %s"), name);
6323	  *input_line_pointer = c;
6324	}
6325      if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6326	input_line_pointer++;
6327    }
6328
6329  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6330}
6331
6332#if !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD)))
6333/* Switch to the text space.  Like s_text, but delete our
6334   label when finished.  */
6335static void
6336pa_text (unused)
6337     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6338{
6339#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6340  current_space = is_defined_space ("$TEXT$");
6341  current_subspace
6342    = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (current_space->sd_seg, 0);
6343#endif
6344
6345  s_text (0);
6346  pa_undefine_label ();
6347}
6348
6349/* Switch to the data space.  As usual delete our label.  */
6350static void
6351pa_data (unused)
6352     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6353{
6354#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6355  current_space = is_defined_space ("$PRIVATE$");
6356  current_subspace
6357    = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (current_space->sd_seg, 0);
6358#endif
6359  s_data (0);
6360  pa_undefine_label ();
6361}
6362
6363/* This is different than the standard GAS s_comm(). On HP9000/800 machines,
6364   the .comm pseudo-op has the following symtax:
6365
6366   <label> .comm <length>
6367
6368   where <label> is optional and is a symbol whose address will be the start of
6369   a block of memory <length> bytes long. <length> must be an absolute
6370   expression.  <length> bytes will be allocated in the current space
6371   and subspace.
6372
6373   Also note the label may not even be on the same line as the .comm.
6374
6375   This difference in syntax means the colon function will be called
6376   on the symbol before we arrive in pa_comm.  colon will set a number
6377   of attributes of the symbol that need to be fixed here.  In particular
6378   the value, section pointer, fragment pointer, flags, etc.  What
6379   a pain.
6380
6381   This also makes error detection all but impossible.  */
6382
6383static void
6384pa_comm (unused)
6385     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6386{
6387  unsigned int size;
6388  symbolS *symbol;
6389  label_symbol_struct *label_symbol = pa_get_label ();
6390
6391  if (label_symbol)
6392    symbol = label_symbol->lss_label;
6393  else
6394    symbol = NULL;
6395
6396  SKIP_WHITESPACE ();
6397  size = get_absolute_expression ();
6398
6399  if (symbol)
6400    {
6401      symbol_get_bfdsym (symbol)->flags |= BSF_OBJECT;
6402      S_SET_VALUE (symbol, size);
6403      S_SET_SEGMENT (symbol, bfd_com_section_ptr);
6404      S_SET_EXTERNAL (symbol);
6405
6406      /* colon() has already set the frag to the current location in the
6407         current subspace; we need to reset the fragment to the zero address
6408         fragment.  We also need to reset the segment pointer.  */
6409      symbol_set_frag (symbol, &zero_address_frag);
6410    }
6411  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6412}
6413#endif /* !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD))) */
6414
6415/* Process a .END pseudo-op.  */
6416
6417static void
6418pa_end (unused)
6419     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6420{
6421  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6422}
6423
6424/* Process a .ENTER pseudo-op.  This is not supported.  */
6425static void
6426pa_enter (unused)
6427     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6428{
6429#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6430  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
6431  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6432#endif
6433
6434  as_bad (_("The .ENTER pseudo-op is not supported"));
6435  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6436}
6437
6438/* Process a .ENTRY pseudo-op.  .ENTRY marks the beginning of the
6439   procedure.  */
6440static void
6441pa_entry (unused)
6442     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6443{
6444#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6445  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
6446  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6447#endif
6448
6449  if (!within_procedure)
6450    as_bad (_("Misplaced .entry. Ignored."));
6451  else
6452    {
6453      if (!callinfo_found)
6454	as_bad (_("Missing .callinfo."));
6455    }
6456  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6457  within_entry_exit = TRUE;
6458
6459#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6460  /* SOM defers building of unwind descriptors until the link phase.
6461     The assembler is responsible for creating an R_ENTRY relocation
6462     to mark the beginning of a region and hold the unwind bits, and
6463     for creating an R_EXIT relocation to mark the end of the region.
6464
6465     FIXME.  ELF should be using the same conventions!  The problem
6466     is an unwind requires too much relocation space.  Hmmm.  Maybe
6467     if we split the unwind bits up between the relocations which
6468     denote the entry and exit points.  */
6469  if (last_call_info->start_symbol != NULL)
6470    {
6471      char *where;
6472      unsigned int u;
6473
6474      where = frag_more (0);
6475      u = UNWIND_LOW32 (&last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor);
6476      fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
6477		    NULL, (offsetT) 0, NULL,
6478		    0, R_HPPA_ENTRY, e_fsel, 0, 0, u);
6479    }
6480#endif
6481}
6482
6483/* Silly nonsense for pa_equ.  The only half-sensible use for this is
6484   being able to subtract two register symbols that specify a range of
6485   registers, to get the size of the range.  */
6486static int fudge_reg_expressions;
6487
6488int
6489hppa_force_reg_syms_absolute (resultP, op, rightP)
6490     expressionS *resultP;
6491     operatorT op ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6492     expressionS *rightP;
6493{
6494  if (fudge_reg_expressions
6495      && rightP->X_op == O_register
6496      && resultP->X_op == O_register)
6497    {
6498      rightP->X_op = O_constant;
6499      resultP->X_op = O_constant;
6500    }
6501  return 0;  /* Continue normal expr handling.  */
6502}
6503
6504/* Handle a .EQU pseudo-op.  */
6505
6506static void
6507pa_equ (reg)
6508     int reg;
6509{
6510  label_symbol_struct *label_symbol = pa_get_label ();
6511  symbolS *symbol;
6512
6513  if (label_symbol)
6514    {
6515      symbol = label_symbol->lss_label;
6516      if (reg)
6517	{
6518	  strict = 1;
6519	  if (!pa_parse_number (&input_line_pointer, 0))
6520	    as_bad (_(".REG expression must be a register"));
6521	  S_SET_VALUE (symbol, pa_number);
6522	  S_SET_SEGMENT (symbol, reg_section);
6523	}
6524      else
6525	{
6526	  expressionS exp;
6527	  segT seg;
6528
6529	  fudge_reg_expressions = 1;
6530	  seg = expression (&exp);
6531	  fudge_reg_expressions = 0;
6532	  if (exp.X_op != O_constant
6533	      && exp.X_op != O_register)
6534	    {
6535	      if (exp.X_op != O_absent)
6536		as_bad (_("bad or irreducible absolute expression; zero assumed"));
6537	      exp.X_add_number = 0;
6538	      seg = absolute_section;
6539	    }
6540	  S_SET_VALUE (symbol, (unsigned int) exp.X_add_number);
6541	  S_SET_SEGMENT (symbol, seg);
6542	}
6543    }
6544  else
6545    {
6546      if (reg)
6547	as_bad (_(".REG must use a label"));
6548      else
6549	as_bad (_(".EQU must use a label"));
6550    }
6551
6552  pa_undefine_label ();
6553  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6554}
6555
6556/* Helper function.  Does processing for the end of a function.  This
6557   usually involves creating some relocations or building special
6558   symbols to mark the end of the function.  */
6559
6560static void
6561process_exit ()
6562{
6563  char *where;
6564
6565  where = frag_more (0);
6566
6567#ifdef OBJ_ELF
6568  /* Mark the end of the function, stuff away the location of the frag
6569     for the end of the function, and finally call pa_build_unwind_subspace
6570     to add an entry in the unwind table.  */
6571  hppa_elf_mark_end_of_function ();
6572  pa_build_unwind_subspace (last_call_info);
6573#else
6574  /* SOM defers building of unwind descriptors until the link phase.
6575     The assembler is responsible for creating an R_ENTRY relocation
6576     to mark the beginning of a region and hold the unwind bits, and
6577     for creating an R_EXIT relocation to mark the end of the region.
6578
6579     FIXME.  ELF should be using the same conventions!  The problem
6580     is an unwind requires too much relocation space.  Hmmm.  Maybe
6581     if we split the unwind bits up between the relocations which
6582     denote the entry and exit points.  */
6583  fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
6584		NULL, (offsetT) 0,
6585		NULL, 0, R_HPPA_EXIT, e_fsel, 0, 0,
6586		UNWIND_HIGH32 (&last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor));
6587#endif
6588}
6589
6590/* Process a .EXIT pseudo-op.  */
6591
6592static void
6593pa_exit (unused)
6594     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6595{
6596#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6597  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
6598  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6599#endif
6600
6601  if (!within_procedure)
6602    as_bad (_(".EXIT must appear within a procedure"));
6603  else
6604    {
6605      if (!callinfo_found)
6606	as_bad (_("Missing .callinfo"));
6607      else
6608	{
6609	  if (!within_entry_exit)
6610	    as_bad (_("No .ENTRY for this .EXIT"));
6611	  else
6612	    {
6613	      within_entry_exit = FALSE;
6614	      process_exit ();
6615	    }
6616	}
6617    }
6618  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6619}
6620
6621/* Process a .EXPORT directive.  This makes functions external
6622   and provides information such as argument relocation entries
6623   to callers.  */
6624
6625static void
6626pa_export (unused)
6627     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6628{
6629  char *name, c, *p;
6630  symbolS *symbol;
6631
6632  name = input_line_pointer;
6633  c = get_symbol_end ();
6634  /* Make sure the given symbol exists.  */
6635  if ((symbol = symbol_find_or_make (name)) == NULL)
6636    {
6637      as_bad (_("Cannot define export symbol: %s\n"), name);
6638      p = input_line_pointer;
6639      *p = c;
6640      input_line_pointer++;
6641    }
6642  else
6643    {
6644      /* OK.  Set the external bits and process argument relocations.
6645         For the HP, weak and global are not mutually exclusive.
6646         S_SET_EXTERNAL will not set BSF_GLOBAL if WEAK is set.
6647         Call S_SET_EXTERNAL to get the other processing.  Manually
6648         set BSF_GLOBAL when we get back.  */
6649      S_SET_EXTERNAL (symbol);
6650      symbol_get_bfdsym (symbol)->flags |= BSF_GLOBAL;
6651      p = input_line_pointer;
6652      *p = c;
6653      if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6654	{
6655	  input_line_pointer++;
6656	  pa_type_args (symbol, 1);
6657	}
6658    }
6659
6660  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6661}
6662
6663/* Helper function to process arguments to a .EXPORT pseudo-op.  */
6664
6665static void
6666pa_type_args (symbolP, is_export)
6667     symbolS *symbolP;
6668     int is_export;
6669{
6670  char *name, c, *p;
6671  unsigned int temp, arg_reloc;
6672  pa_symbol_type type = SYMBOL_TYPE_UNKNOWN;
6673  asymbol *bfdsym = symbol_get_bfdsym (symbolP);
6674
6675  if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "absolute", 8) == 0)
6676
6677    {
6678      input_line_pointer += 8;
6679      bfdsym->flags &= ~BSF_FUNCTION;
6680      S_SET_SEGMENT (symbolP, bfd_abs_section_ptr);
6681      type = SYMBOL_TYPE_ABSOLUTE;
6682    }
6683  else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "code", 4) == 0)
6684    {
6685      input_line_pointer += 4;
6686      /* IMPORTing/EXPORTing CODE types for functions is meaningless for SOM,
6687         instead one should be IMPORTing/EXPORTing ENTRY types.
6688
6689         Complain if one tries to EXPORT a CODE type since that's never
6690         done.  Both GCC and HP C still try to IMPORT CODE types, so
6691         silently fix them to be ENTRY types.  */
6692      if (S_IS_FUNCTION (symbolP))
6693	{
6694	  if (is_export)
6695	    as_tsktsk (_("Using ENTRY rather than CODE in export directive for %s"),
6696		       S_GET_NAME (symbolP));
6697
6698	  bfdsym->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6699	  type = SYMBOL_TYPE_ENTRY;
6700	}
6701      else
6702	{
6703	  bfdsym->flags &= ~BSF_FUNCTION;
6704	  type = SYMBOL_TYPE_CODE;
6705	}
6706    }
6707  else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "data", 4) == 0)
6708    {
6709      input_line_pointer += 4;
6710      bfdsym->flags &= ~BSF_FUNCTION;
6711      bfdsym->flags |= BSF_OBJECT;
6712      type = SYMBOL_TYPE_DATA;
6713    }
6714  else if ((strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "entry", 5) == 0))
6715    {
6716      input_line_pointer += 5;
6717      bfdsym->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6718      type = SYMBOL_TYPE_ENTRY;
6719    }
6720  else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "millicode", 9) == 0)
6721    {
6722      input_line_pointer += 9;
6723      bfdsym->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6724#ifdef OBJ_ELF
6725      {
6726	elf_symbol_type *elfsym = (elf_symbol_type *) bfdsym;
6727	elfsym->internal_elf_sym.st_info =
6728	  ELF_ST_INFO (ELF_ST_BIND (elfsym->internal_elf_sym.st_info),
6729		       STT_PARISC_MILLI);
6730      }
6731#endif
6732      type = SYMBOL_TYPE_MILLICODE;
6733    }
6734  else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "plabel", 6) == 0)
6735    {
6736      input_line_pointer += 6;
6737      bfdsym->flags &= ~BSF_FUNCTION;
6738      type = SYMBOL_TYPE_PLABEL;
6739    }
6740  else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "pri_prog", 8) == 0)
6741    {
6742      input_line_pointer += 8;
6743      bfdsym->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6744      type = SYMBOL_TYPE_PRI_PROG;
6745    }
6746  else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "sec_prog", 8) == 0)
6747    {
6748      input_line_pointer += 8;
6749      bfdsym->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6750      type = SYMBOL_TYPE_SEC_PROG;
6751    }
6752
6753  /* SOM requires much more information about symbol types
6754     than BFD understands.  This is how we get this information
6755     to the SOM BFD backend.  */
6756#ifdef obj_set_symbol_type
6757  obj_set_symbol_type (bfdsym, (int) type);
6758#endif
6759
6760  /* Now that the type of the exported symbol has been handled,
6761     handle any argument relocation information.  */
6762  while (!is_end_of_statement ())
6763    {
6764      if (*input_line_pointer == ',')
6765	input_line_pointer++;
6766      name = input_line_pointer;
6767      c = get_symbol_end ();
6768      /* Argument sources.  */
6769      if ((strncasecmp (name, "argw", 4) == 0))
6770	{
6771	  p = input_line_pointer;
6772	  *p = c;
6773	  input_line_pointer++;
6774	  temp = atoi (name + 4);
6775	  name = input_line_pointer;
6776	  c = get_symbol_end ();
6777	  arg_reloc = pa_align_arg_reloc (temp, pa_build_arg_reloc (name));
6778#if defined (OBJ_SOM) || defined (ELF_ARG_RELOC)
6779	  symbol_arg_reloc_info (symbolP) |= arg_reloc;
6780#endif
6781	  *input_line_pointer = c;
6782	}
6783      /* The return value.  */
6784      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "rtnval", 6)) == 0)
6785	{
6786	  p = input_line_pointer;
6787	  *p = c;
6788	  input_line_pointer++;
6789	  name = input_line_pointer;
6790	  c = get_symbol_end ();
6791	  arg_reloc = pa_build_arg_reloc (name);
6792#if defined (OBJ_SOM) || defined (ELF_ARG_RELOC)
6793	  symbol_arg_reloc_info (symbolP) |= arg_reloc;
6794#endif
6795	  *input_line_pointer = c;
6796	}
6797      /* Privilege level.  */
6798      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "priv_lev", 8)) == 0)
6799	{
6800	  p = input_line_pointer;
6801	  *p = c;
6802	  input_line_pointer++;
6803	  temp = atoi (input_line_pointer);
6804#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6805	  ((obj_symbol_type *) bfdsym)->tc_data.ap.hppa_priv_level = temp;
6806#endif
6807	  c = get_symbol_end ();
6808	  *input_line_pointer = c;
6809	}
6810      else
6811	{
6812	  as_bad (_("Undefined .EXPORT/.IMPORT argument (ignored): %s"), name);
6813	  p = input_line_pointer;
6814	  *p = c;
6815	}
6816      if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6817	input_line_pointer++;
6818    }
6819}
6820
6821/* Handle an .IMPORT pseudo-op.  Any symbol referenced in a given
6822   assembly file must either be defined in the assembly file, or
6823   explicitly IMPORTED from another.  */
6824
6825static void
6826pa_import (unused)
6827     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6828{
6829  char *name, c, *p;
6830  symbolS *symbol;
6831
6832  name = input_line_pointer;
6833  c = get_symbol_end ();
6834
6835  symbol = symbol_find (name);
6836  /* Ugh.  We might be importing a symbol defined earlier in the file,
6837     in which case all the code below will really screw things up
6838     (set the wrong segment, symbol flags & type, etc).  */
6839  if (symbol == NULL || !S_IS_DEFINED (symbol))
6840    {
6841      symbol = symbol_find_or_make (name);
6842      p = input_line_pointer;
6843      *p = c;
6844
6845      if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6846	{
6847	  input_line_pointer++;
6848	  pa_type_args (symbol, 0);
6849	}
6850      else
6851	{
6852	  /* Sigh.  To be compatible with the HP assembler and to help
6853	     poorly written assembly code, we assign a type based on
6854	     the current segment.  Note only BSF_FUNCTION really
6855	     matters, we do not need to set the full SYMBOL_TYPE_* info.  */
6856	  if (now_seg == text_section)
6857	    symbol_get_bfdsym (symbol)->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6858
6859	  /* If the section is undefined, then the symbol is undefined
6860	     Since this is an import, leave the section undefined.  */
6861	  S_SET_SEGMENT (symbol, bfd_und_section_ptr);
6862	}
6863    }
6864  else
6865    {
6866      /* The symbol was already defined.  Just eat everything up to
6867	 the end of the current statement.  */
6868      while (!is_end_of_statement ())
6869	input_line_pointer++;
6870    }
6871
6872  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6873}
6874
6875/* Handle a .LABEL pseudo-op.  */
6876
6877static void
6878pa_label (unused)
6879     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6880{
6881  char *name, c, *p;
6882
6883  name = input_line_pointer;
6884  c = get_symbol_end ();
6885
6886  if (strlen (name) > 0)
6887    {
6888      colon (name);
6889      p = input_line_pointer;
6890      *p = c;
6891    }
6892  else
6893    {
6894      as_warn (_("Missing label name on .LABEL"));
6895    }
6896
6897  if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6898    {
6899      as_warn (_("extra .LABEL arguments ignored."));
6900      ignore_rest_of_line ();
6901    }
6902  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6903}
6904
6905/* Handle a .LEAVE pseudo-op.  This is not supported yet.  */
6906
6907static void
6908pa_leave (unused)
6909     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6910{
6911#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6912  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
6913  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6914#endif
6915
6916  as_bad (_("The .LEAVE pseudo-op is not supported"));
6917  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6918}
6919
6920/* Handle a .LEVEL pseudo-op.  */
6921
6922static void
6923pa_level (unused)
6924     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6925{
6926  char *level;
6927
6928  level = input_line_pointer;
6929  if (strncmp (level, "1.0", 3) == 0)
6930    {
6931      input_line_pointer += 3;
6932      if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, 10))
6933	as_warn (_("could not set architecture and machine"));
6934    }
6935  else if (strncmp (level, "1.1", 3) == 0)
6936    {
6937      input_line_pointer += 3;
6938      if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, 11))
6939	as_warn (_("could not set architecture and machine"));
6940    }
6941  else if (strncmp (level, "2.0w", 4) == 0)
6942    {
6943      input_line_pointer += 4;
6944      if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, 25))
6945	as_warn (_("could not set architecture and machine"));
6946    }
6947  else if (strncmp (level, "2.0", 3) == 0)
6948    {
6949      input_line_pointer += 3;
6950      if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, 20))
6951	as_warn (_("could not set architecture and machine"));
6952    }
6953  else
6954    {
6955      as_bad (_("Unrecognized .LEVEL argument\n"));
6956      ignore_rest_of_line ();
6957    }
6958  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6959}
6960
6961/* Handle a .ORIGIN pseudo-op.  */
6962
6963static void
6964pa_origin (unused)
6965     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6966{
6967#ifdef OBJ_SOM
6968  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
6969  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6970#endif
6971
6972  s_org (0);
6973  pa_undefine_label ();
6974}
6975
6976/* Handle a .PARAM pseudo-op.  This is much like a .EXPORT, except it
6977   is for static functions.  FIXME.  Should share more code with .EXPORT.  */
6978
6979static void
6980pa_param (unused)
6981     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
6982{
6983  char *name, c, *p;
6984  symbolS *symbol;
6985
6986  name = input_line_pointer;
6987  c = get_symbol_end ();
6988
6989  if ((symbol = symbol_find_or_make (name)) == NULL)
6990    {
6991      as_bad (_("Cannot define static symbol: %s\n"), name);
6992      p = input_line_pointer;
6993      *p = c;
6994      input_line_pointer++;
6995    }
6996  else
6997    {
6998      S_CLEAR_EXTERNAL (symbol);
6999      p = input_line_pointer;
7000      *p = c;
7001      if (!is_end_of_statement ())
7002	{
7003	  input_line_pointer++;
7004	  pa_type_args (symbol, 0);
7005	}
7006    }
7007
7008  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7009}
7010
7011/* Handle a .PROC pseudo-op.  It is used to mark the beginning
7012   of a procedure from a syntactical point of view.  */
7013
7014static void
7015pa_proc (unused)
7016     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7017{
7018  struct call_info *call_info;
7019
7020#ifdef OBJ_SOM
7021  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
7022  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
7023#endif
7024
7025  if (within_procedure)
7026    as_fatal (_("Nested procedures"));
7027
7028  /* Reset global variables for new procedure.  */
7029  callinfo_found = FALSE;
7030  within_procedure = TRUE;
7031
7032  /* Create another call_info structure.  */
7033  call_info = (struct call_info *) xmalloc (sizeof (struct call_info));
7034
7035  if (!call_info)
7036    as_fatal (_("Cannot allocate unwind descriptor\n"));
7037
7038  memset (call_info, 0, sizeof (struct call_info));
7039
7040  call_info->ci_next = NULL;
7041
7042  if (call_info_root == NULL)
7043    {
7044      call_info_root = call_info;
7045      last_call_info = call_info;
7046    }
7047  else
7048    {
7049      last_call_info->ci_next = call_info;
7050      last_call_info = call_info;
7051    }
7052
7053  /* set up defaults on call_info structure */
7054
7055  call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.cannot_unwind = 0;
7056  call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.region_desc = 1;
7057  call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.hpux_interrupt_marker = 0;
7058
7059  /* If we got a .PROC pseudo-op, we know that the function is defined
7060     locally.  Make sure it gets into the symbol table.  */
7061  {
7062    label_symbol_struct *label_symbol = pa_get_label ();
7063
7064    if (label_symbol)
7065      {
7066	if (label_symbol->lss_label)
7067	  {
7068	    last_call_info->start_symbol = label_symbol->lss_label;
7069	    symbol_get_bfdsym (label_symbol->lss_label)->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
7070	  }
7071	else
7072	  as_bad (_("Missing function name for .PROC (corrupted label chain)"));
7073      }
7074    else
7075      last_call_info->start_symbol = NULL;
7076  }
7077
7078  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7079}
7080
7081/* Process the syntactical end of a procedure.  Make sure all the
7082   appropriate pseudo-ops were found within the procedure.  */
7083
7084static void
7085pa_procend (unused)
7086     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7087{
7088
7089#ifdef OBJ_SOM
7090  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
7091  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
7092#endif
7093
7094  /* If we are within a procedure definition, make sure we've
7095     defined a label for the procedure; handle case where the
7096     label was defined after the .PROC directive.
7097
7098     Note there's not need to diddle with the segment or fragment
7099     for the label symbol in this case.  We have already switched
7100     into the new $CODE$ subspace at this point.  */
7101  if (within_procedure && last_call_info->start_symbol == NULL)
7102    {
7103      label_symbol_struct *label_symbol = pa_get_label ();
7104
7105      if (label_symbol)
7106	{
7107	  if (label_symbol->lss_label)
7108	    {
7109	      last_call_info->start_symbol = label_symbol->lss_label;
7110	      symbol_get_bfdsym (label_symbol->lss_label)->flags
7111		|= BSF_FUNCTION;
7112#ifdef OBJ_SOM
7113	      /* Also handle allocation of a fixup to hold the unwind
7114		 information when the label appears after the proc/procend.  */
7115	      if (within_entry_exit)
7116		{
7117		  char *where;
7118		  unsigned int u;
7119
7120		  where = frag_more (0);
7121		  u = UNWIND_LOW32 (&last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor);
7122		  fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
7123				NULL, (offsetT) 0, NULL,
7124				0, R_HPPA_ENTRY, e_fsel, 0, 0, u);
7125		}
7126#endif
7127	    }
7128	  else
7129	    as_bad (_("Missing function name for .PROC (corrupted label chain)"));
7130	}
7131      else
7132	as_bad (_("Missing function name for .PROC"));
7133    }
7134
7135  if (!within_procedure)
7136    as_bad (_("misplaced .procend"));
7137
7138  if (!callinfo_found)
7139    as_bad (_("Missing .callinfo for this procedure"));
7140
7141  if (within_entry_exit)
7142    as_bad (_("Missing .EXIT for a .ENTRY"));
7143
7144#ifdef OBJ_ELF
7145  /* ELF needs to mark the end of each function so that it can compute
7146     the size of the function (apparently its needed in the symbol table).  */
7147  hppa_elf_mark_end_of_function ();
7148#endif
7149
7150  within_procedure = FALSE;
7151  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7152  pa_undefine_label ();
7153}
7154
7155#ifdef OBJ_SOM
7156/* If VALUE is an exact power of two between zero and 2^31, then
7157   return log2 (VALUE).  Else return -1.  */
7158
7159static int
7160exact_log2 (value)
7161     int value;
7162{
7163  int shift = 0;
7164
7165  while ((1 << shift) != value && shift < 32)
7166    shift++;
7167
7168  if (shift >= 32)
7169    return -1;
7170  else
7171    return shift;
7172}
7173
7174/* Check to make sure we have a valid space and subspace.  */
7175
7176static void
7177pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ()
7178{
7179  if (current_space == NULL)
7180    as_fatal (_("Not in a space.\n"));
7181
7182  if (current_subspace == NULL)
7183    as_fatal (_("Not in a subspace.\n"));
7184}
7185
7186/* Parse the parameters to a .SPACE directive; if CREATE_FLAG is nonzero,
7187   then create a new space entry to hold the information specified
7188   by the parameters to the .SPACE directive.  */
7189
7190static sd_chain_struct *
7191pa_parse_space_stmt (space_name, create_flag)
7192     char *space_name;
7193     int create_flag;
7194{
7195  char *name, *ptemp, c;
7196  char loadable, defined, private, sort;
7197  int spnum;
7198  asection *seg = NULL;
7199  sd_chain_struct *space;
7200
7201  /* load default values */
7202  spnum = 0;
7203  sort = 0;
7204  loadable = TRUE;
7205  defined = TRUE;
7206  private = FALSE;
7207  if (strcmp (space_name, "$TEXT$") == 0)
7208    {
7209      seg = pa_def_spaces[0].segment;
7210      defined = pa_def_spaces[0].defined;
7211      private = pa_def_spaces[0].private;
7212      sort = pa_def_spaces[0].sort;
7213      spnum = pa_def_spaces[0].spnum;
7214    }
7215  else if (strcmp (space_name, "$PRIVATE$") == 0)
7216    {
7217      seg = pa_def_spaces[1].segment;
7218      defined = pa_def_spaces[1].defined;
7219      private = pa_def_spaces[1].private;
7220      sort = pa_def_spaces[1].sort;
7221      spnum = pa_def_spaces[1].spnum;
7222    }
7223
7224  if (!is_end_of_statement ())
7225    {
7226      print_errors = FALSE;
7227      ptemp = input_line_pointer + 1;
7228      /* First see if the space was specified as a number rather than
7229         as a name.  According to the PA assembly manual the rest of
7230         the line should be ignored.  */
7231      strict = 0;
7232      pa_parse_number (&ptemp, 0);
7233      if (pa_number >= 0)
7234	{
7235	  spnum = pa_number;
7236	  input_line_pointer = ptemp;
7237	}
7238      else
7239	{
7240	  while (!is_end_of_statement ())
7241	    {
7242	      input_line_pointer++;
7243	      name = input_line_pointer;
7244	      c = get_symbol_end ();
7245	      if ((strncasecmp (name, "spnum", 5) == 0))
7246		{
7247		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7248		  input_line_pointer++;
7249		  spnum = get_absolute_expression ();
7250		}
7251	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "sort", 4) == 0))
7252		{
7253		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7254		  input_line_pointer++;
7255		  sort = get_absolute_expression ();
7256		}
7257	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "unloadable", 10) == 0))
7258		{
7259		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7260		  loadable = FALSE;
7261		}
7262	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "notdefined", 10) == 0))
7263		{
7264		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7265		  defined = FALSE;
7266		}
7267	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "private", 7) == 0))
7268		{
7269		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7270		  private = TRUE;
7271		}
7272	      else
7273		{
7274		  as_bad (_("Invalid .SPACE argument"));
7275		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7276		  if (!is_end_of_statement ())
7277		    input_line_pointer++;
7278		}
7279	    }
7280	}
7281      print_errors = TRUE;
7282    }
7283
7284  if (create_flag && seg == NULL)
7285    seg = subseg_new (space_name, 0);
7286
7287  /* If create_flag is nonzero, then create the new space with
7288     the attributes computed above.  Else set the values in
7289     an already existing space -- this can only happen for
7290     the first occurrence of a built-in space.  */
7291  if (create_flag)
7292    space = create_new_space (space_name, spnum, loadable, defined,
7293			      private, sort, seg, 1);
7294  else
7295    {
7296      space = is_defined_space (space_name);
7297      SPACE_SPNUM (space) = spnum;
7298      SPACE_DEFINED (space) = defined & 1;
7299      SPACE_USER_DEFINED (space) = 1;
7300    }
7301
7302#ifdef obj_set_section_attributes
7303  obj_set_section_attributes (seg, defined, private, sort, spnum);
7304#endif
7305
7306  return space;
7307}
7308
7309/* Handle a .SPACE pseudo-op; this switches the current space to the
7310   given space, creating the new space if necessary.  */
7311
7312static void
7313pa_space (unused)
7314     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7315{
7316  char *name, c, *space_name, *save_s;
7317  sd_chain_struct *sd_chain;
7318
7319  if (within_procedure)
7320    {
7321      as_bad (_("Can\'t change spaces within a procedure definition. Ignored"));
7322      ignore_rest_of_line ();
7323    }
7324  else
7325    {
7326      /* Check for some of the predefined spaces.   FIXME: most of the code
7327         below is repeated several times, can we extract the common parts
7328         and place them into a subroutine or something similar?  */
7329      /* FIXME Is this (and the next IF stmt) really right?
7330	 What if INPUT_LINE_POINTER points to "$TEXT$FOO"?  */
7331      if (strncmp (input_line_pointer, "$TEXT$", 6) == 0)
7332	{
7333	  input_line_pointer += 6;
7334	  sd_chain = is_defined_space ("$TEXT$");
7335	  if (sd_chain == NULL)
7336	    sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt ("$TEXT$", 1);
7337	  else if (SPACE_USER_DEFINED (sd_chain) == 0)
7338	    sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt ("$TEXT$", 0);
7339
7340	  current_space = sd_chain;
7341	  subseg_set (text_section, sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7342	  current_subspace
7343	    = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (text_section,
7344					 sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7345	  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7346	  return;
7347	}
7348      if (strncmp (input_line_pointer, "$PRIVATE$", 9) == 0)
7349	{
7350	  input_line_pointer += 9;
7351	  sd_chain = is_defined_space ("$PRIVATE$");
7352	  if (sd_chain == NULL)
7353	    sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt ("$PRIVATE$", 1);
7354	  else if (SPACE_USER_DEFINED (sd_chain) == 0)
7355	    sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt ("$PRIVATE$", 0);
7356
7357	  current_space = sd_chain;
7358	  subseg_set (data_section, sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7359	  current_subspace
7360	    = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (data_section,
7361					 sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7362	  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7363	  return;
7364	}
7365      if (!strncasecmp (input_line_pointer,
7366			GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME,
7367			strlen (GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME)))
7368	{
7369	  input_line_pointer += strlen (GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME);
7370	  sd_chain = is_defined_space (GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME);
7371	  if (sd_chain == NULL)
7372	    sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt (GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME, 1);
7373	  else if (SPACE_USER_DEFINED (sd_chain) == 0)
7374	    sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt (GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME, 0);
7375
7376	  current_space = sd_chain;
7377
7378	  {
7379	    asection *gdb_section
7380	    = bfd_make_section_old_way (stdoutput, GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME);
7381
7382	    subseg_set (gdb_section, sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7383	    current_subspace
7384	      = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (gdb_section,
7385					   sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7386	  }
7387	  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7388	  return;
7389	}
7390
7391      /* It could be a space specified by number.  */
7392      print_errors = 0;
7393      save_s = input_line_pointer;
7394      strict = 0;
7395      pa_parse_number (&input_line_pointer, 0);
7396      if (pa_number >= 0)
7397	{
7398	  if ((sd_chain = pa_find_space_by_number (pa_number)))
7399	    {
7400	      current_space = sd_chain;
7401
7402	      subseg_set (sd_chain->sd_seg, sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7403	      current_subspace
7404		= pa_subsegment_to_subspace (sd_chain->sd_seg,
7405					     sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7406	      demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7407	      return;
7408	    }
7409	}
7410
7411      /* Not a number, attempt to create a new space.  */
7412      print_errors = 1;
7413      input_line_pointer = save_s;
7414      name = input_line_pointer;
7415      c = get_symbol_end ();
7416      space_name = xmalloc (strlen (name) + 1);
7417      strcpy (space_name, name);
7418      *input_line_pointer = c;
7419
7420      sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt (space_name, 1);
7421      current_space = sd_chain;
7422
7423      subseg_set (sd_chain->sd_seg, sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7424      current_subspace = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (sd_chain->sd_seg,
7425						  sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7426      demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7427    }
7428}
7429
7430/* Switch to a new space.  (I think).  FIXME.  */
7431
7432static void
7433pa_spnum (unused)
7434     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7435{
7436  char *name;
7437  char c;
7438  char *p;
7439  sd_chain_struct *space;
7440
7441  name = input_line_pointer;
7442  c = get_symbol_end ();
7443  space = is_defined_space (name);
7444  if (space)
7445    {
7446      p = frag_more (4);
7447      md_number_to_chars (p, SPACE_SPNUM (space), 4);
7448    }
7449  else
7450    as_warn (_("Undefined space: '%s' Assuming space number = 0."), name);
7451
7452  *input_line_pointer = c;
7453  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7454}
7455
7456/* Handle a .SUBSPACE pseudo-op; this switches the current subspace to the
7457   given subspace, creating the new subspace if necessary.
7458
7459   FIXME.  Should mirror pa_space more closely, in particular how
7460   they're broken up into subroutines.  */
7461
7462static void
7463pa_subspace (create_new)
7464     int create_new;
7465{
7466  char *name, *ss_name, c;
7467  char loadable, code_only, comdat, common, dup_common, zero, sort;
7468  int i, access, space_index, alignment, quadrant, applicable, flags;
7469  sd_chain_struct *space;
7470  ssd_chain_struct *ssd;
7471  asection *section;
7472
7473  if (current_space == NULL)
7474    as_fatal (_("Must be in a space before changing or declaring subspaces.\n"));
7475
7476  if (within_procedure)
7477    {
7478      as_bad (_("Can\'t change subspaces within a procedure definition. Ignored"));
7479      ignore_rest_of_line ();
7480    }
7481  else
7482    {
7483      name = input_line_pointer;
7484      c = get_symbol_end ();
7485      ss_name = xmalloc (strlen (name) + 1);
7486      strcpy (ss_name, name);
7487      *input_line_pointer = c;
7488
7489      /* Load default values.  */
7490      sort = 0;
7491      access = 0x7f;
7492      loadable = 1;
7493      comdat = 0;
7494      common = 0;
7495      dup_common = 0;
7496      code_only = 0;
7497      zero = 0;
7498      space_index = ~0;
7499      alignment = 1;
7500      quadrant = 0;
7501
7502      space = current_space;
7503      if (create_new)
7504	ssd = NULL;
7505      else
7506	ssd = is_defined_subspace (ss_name);
7507      /* Allow user to override the builtin attributes of subspaces.  But
7508         only allow the attributes to be changed once!  */
7509      if (ssd && SUBSPACE_DEFINED (ssd))
7510	{
7511	  subseg_set (ssd->ssd_seg, ssd->ssd_subseg);
7512	  current_subspace = ssd;
7513	  if (!is_end_of_statement ())
7514	    as_warn (_("Parameters of an existing subspace can\'t be modified"));
7515	  demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7516	  return;
7517	}
7518      else
7519	{
7520	  /* A new subspace.  Load default values if it matches one of
7521	     the builtin subspaces.  */
7522	  i = 0;
7523	  while (pa_def_subspaces[i].name)
7524	    {
7525	      if (strcasecmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, ss_name) == 0)
7526		{
7527		  loadable = pa_def_subspaces[i].loadable;
7528		  comdat = pa_def_subspaces[i].comdat;
7529		  common = pa_def_subspaces[i].common;
7530		  dup_common = pa_def_subspaces[i].dup_common;
7531		  code_only = pa_def_subspaces[i].code_only;
7532		  zero = pa_def_subspaces[i].zero;
7533		  space_index = pa_def_subspaces[i].space_index;
7534		  alignment = pa_def_subspaces[i].alignment;
7535		  quadrant = pa_def_subspaces[i].quadrant;
7536		  access = pa_def_subspaces[i].access;
7537		  sort = pa_def_subspaces[i].sort;
7538		  break;
7539		}
7540	      i++;
7541	    }
7542	}
7543
7544      /* We should be working with a new subspace now.  Fill in
7545         any information as specified by the user.  */
7546      if (!is_end_of_statement ())
7547	{
7548	  input_line_pointer++;
7549	  while (!is_end_of_statement ())
7550	    {
7551	      name = input_line_pointer;
7552	      c = get_symbol_end ();
7553	      if ((strncasecmp (name, "quad", 4) == 0))
7554		{
7555		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7556		  input_line_pointer++;
7557		  quadrant = get_absolute_expression ();
7558		}
7559	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "align", 5) == 0))
7560		{
7561		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7562		  input_line_pointer++;
7563		  alignment = get_absolute_expression ();
7564		  if (exact_log2 (alignment) == -1)
7565		    {
7566		      as_bad (_("Alignment must be a power of 2"));
7567		      alignment = 1;
7568		    }
7569		}
7570	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "access", 6) == 0))
7571		{
7572		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7573		  input_line_pointer++;
7574		  access = get_absolute_expression ();
7575		}
7576	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "sort", 4) == 0))
7577		{
7578		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7579		  input_line_pointer++;
7580		  sort = get_absolute_expression ();
7581		}
7582	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "code_only", 9) == 0))
7583		{
7584		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7585		  code_only = 1;
7586		}
7587	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "unloadable", 10) == 0))
7588		{
7589		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7590		  loadable = 0;
7591		}
7592	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "comdat", 6) == 0))
7593		{
7594		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7595		  comdat = 1;
7596		}
7597	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "common", 6) == 0))
7598		{
7599		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7600		  common = 1;
7601		}
7602	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "dup_comm", 8) == 0))
7603		{
7604		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7605		  dup_common = 1;
7606		}
7607	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "zero", 4) == 0))
7608		{
7609		  *input_line_pointer = c;
7610		  zero = 1;
7611		}
7612	      else if ((strncasecmp (name, "first", 5) == 0))
7613		as_bad (_("FIRST not supported as a .SUBSPACE argument"));
7614	      else
7615		as_bad (_("Invalid .SUBSPACE argument"));
7616	      if (!is_end_of_statement ())
7617		input_line_pointer++;
7618	    }
7619	}
7620
7621      /* Compute a reasonable set of BFD flags based on the information
7622         in the .subspace directive.  */
7623      applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7624      flags = 0;
7625      if (loadable)
7626	flags |= (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD);
7627      if (code_only)
7628	flags |= SEC_CODE;
7629
7630      /* These flags are used to implement various flavors of initialized
7631	 common.  The SOM linker discards duplicate subspaces when they
7632	 have the same "key" symbol name.  This support is more like
7633	 GNU linkonce than BFD common.  Further, pc-relative relocations
7634	 are converted to section relative relocations in BFD common
7635	 sections.  This complicates the handling of relocations in
7636	 common sections containing text and isn't currently supported
7637	 correctly in the SOM BFD backend.  */
7638      if (comdat || common || dup_common)
7639	flags |= SEC_LINK_ONCE;
7640
7641      flags |= SEC_RELOC | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS;
7642
7643      /* This is a zero-filled subspace (eg BSS).  */
7644      if (zero)
7645	flags &= ~(SEC_LOAD | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS);
7646
7647      applicable &= flags;
7648
7649      /* If this is an existing subspace, then we want to use the
7650         segment already associated with the subspace.
7651
7652         FIXME NOW!  ELF BFD doesn't appear to be ready to deal with
7653         lots of sections.  It might be a problem in the PA ELF
7654         code, I do not know yet.  For now avoid creating anything
7655         but the "standard" sections for ELF.  */
7656      if (create_new)
7657	section = subseg_force_new (ss_name, 0);
7658      else if (ssd)
7659	section = ssd->ssd_seg;
7660      else
7661	section = subseg_new (ss_name, 0);
7662
7663      if (zero)
7664	seg_info (section)->bss = 1;
7665
7666      /* Now set the flags.  */
7667      bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, section, applicable);
7668
7669      /* Record any alignment request for this section.  */
7670      record_alignment (section, exact_log2 (alignment));
7671
7672      /* Set the starting offset for this section.  */
7673      bfd_set_section_vma (stdoutput, section,
7674			   pa_subspace_start (space, quadrant));
7675
7676      /* Now that all the flags are set, update an existing subspace,
7677         or create a new one.  */
7678      if (ssd)
7679
7680	current_subspace = update_subspace (space, ss_name, loadable,
7681					    code_only, comdat, common,
7682					    dup_common, sort, zero, access,
7683					    space_index, alignment, quadrant,
7684					    section);
7685      else
7686	current_subspace = create_new_subspace (space, ss_name, loadable,
7687						code_only, comdat, common,
7688						dup_common, zero, sort,
7689						access, space_index,
7690						alignment, quadrant, section);
7691
7692      demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7693      current_subspace->ssd_seg = section;
7694      subseg_set (current_subspace->ssd_seg, current_subspace->ssd_subseg);
7695    }
7696  SUBSPACE_DEFINED (current_subspace) = 1;
7697}
7698
7699/* Create default space and subspace dictionaries.  */
7700
7701static void
7702pa_spaces_begin ()
7703{
7704  int i;
7705
7706  space_dict_root = NULL;
7707  space_dict_last = NULL;
7708
7709  i = 0;
7710  while (pa_def_spaces[i].name)
7711    {
7712      char *name;
7713
7714      /* Pick the right name to use for the new section.  */
7715      name = pa_def_spaces[i].name;
7716
7717      pa_def_spaces[i].segment = subseg_new (name, 0);
7718      create_new_space (pa_def_spaces[i].name, pa_def_spaces[i].spnum,
7719			pa_def_spaces[i].loadable, pa_def_spaces[i].defined,
7720			pa_def_spaces[i].private, pa_def_spaces[i].sort,
7721			pa_def_spaces[i].segment, 0);
7722      i++;
7723    }
7724
7725  i = 0;
7726  while (pa_def_subspaces[i].name)
7727    {
7728      char *name;
7729      int applicable, subsegment;
7730      asection *segment = NULL;
7731      sd_chain_struct *space;
7732
7733      /* Pick the right name for the new section and pick the right
7734         subsegment number.  */
7735      name = pa_def_subspaces[i].name;
7736      subsegment = 0;
7737
7738      /* Create the new section.  */
7739      segment = subseg_new (name, subsegment);
7740
7741      /* For SOM we want to replace the standard .text, .data, and .bss
7742         sections with our own.   We also want to set BFD flags for
7743	 all the built-in subspaces.  */
7744      if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$CODE$"))
7745	{
7746	  text_section = segment;
7747	  applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7748	  bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7749				 applicable & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
7750					       | SEC_RELOC | SEC_CODE
7751					       | SEC_READONLY
7752					       | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS));
7753	}
7754      else if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$DATA$"))
7755	{
7756	  data_section = segment;
7757	  applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7758	  bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7759				 applicable & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
7760					       | SEC_RELOC
7761					       | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS));
7762
7763	}
7764      else if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$BSS$"))
7765	{
7766	  bss_section = segment;
7767	  applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7768	  bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7769				 applicable & SEC_ALLOC);
7770	}
7771      else if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$LIT$"))
7772	{
7773	  applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7774	  bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7775				 applicable & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
7776					       | SEC_RELOC
7777					       | SEC_READONLY
7778					       | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS));
7779	}
7780      else if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$MILLICODE$"))
7781	{
7782	  applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7783	  bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7784				 applicable & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
7785					       | SEC_RELOC
7786					       | SEC_READONLY
7787					       | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS));
7788	}
7789      else if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$UNWIND$"))
7790	{
7791	  applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7792	  bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7793				 applicable & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
7794					       | SEC_RELOC
7795					       | SEC_READONLY
7796					       | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS));
7797	}
7798
7799      /* Find the space associated with this subspace.  */
7800      space = pa_segment_to_space (pa_def_spaces[pa_def_subspaces[i].
7801						 def_space_index].segment);
7802      if (space == NULL)
7803	{
7804	  as_fatal (_("Internal error: Unable to find containing space for %s."),
7805		    pa_def_subspaces[i].name);
7806	}
7807
7808      create_new_subspace (space, name,
7809			   pa_def_subspaces[i].loadable,
7810			   pa_def_subspaces[i].code_only,
7811			   pa_def_subspaces[i].comdat,
7812			   pa_def_subspaces[i].common,
7813			   pa_def_subspaces[i].dup_common,
7814			   pa_def_subspaces[i].zero,
7815			   pa_def_subspaces[i].sort,
7816			   pa_def_subspaces[i].access,
7817			   pa_def_subspaces[i].space_index,
7818			   pa_def_subspaces[i].alignment,
7819			   pa_def_subspaces[i].quadrant,
7820			   segment);
7821      i++;
7822    }
7823}
7824
7825/* Create a new space NAME, with the appropriate flags as defined
7826   by the given parameters.  */
7827
7828static sd_chain_struct *
7829create_new_space (name, spnum, loadable, defined, private,
7830		  sort, seg, user_defined)
7831     char *name;
7832     int spnum;
7833     int loadable ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7834     int defined;
7835     int private;
7836     int sort;
7837     asection *seg;
7838     int user_defined;
7839{
7840  sd_chain_struct *chain_entry;
7841
7842  chain_entry = (sd_chain_struct *) xmalloc (sizeof (sd_chain_struct));
7843  if (!chain_entry)
7844    as_fatal (_("Out of memory: could not allocate new space chain entry: %s\n"),
7845	      name);
7846
7847  SPACE_NAME (chain_entry) = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (name) + 1);
7848  strcpy (SPACE_NAME (chain_entry), name);
7849  SPACE_DEFINED (chain_entry) = defined;
7850  SPACE_USER_DEFINED (chain_entry) = user_defined;
7851  SPACE_SPNUM (chain_entry) = spnum;
7852
7853  chain_entry->sd_seg = seg;
7854  chain_entry->sd_last_subseg = -1;
7855  chain_entry->sd_subspaces = NULL;
7856  chain_entry->sd_next = NULL;
7857
7858  /* Find spot for the new space based on its sort key.  */
7859  if (!space_dict_last)
7860    space_dict_last = chain_entry;
7861
7862  if (space_dict_root == NULL)
7863    space_dict_root = chain_entry;
7864  else
7865    {
7866      sd_chain_struct *chain_pointer;
7867      sd_chain_struct *prev_chain_pointer;
7868
7869      chain_pointer = space_dict_root;
7870      prev_chain_pointer = NULL;
7871
7872      while (chain_pointer)
7873	{
7874	  prev_chain_pointer = chain_pointer;
7875	  chain_pointer = chain_pointer->sd_next;
7876	}
7877
7878      /* At this point we've found the correct place to add the new
7879         entry.  So add it and update the linked lists as appropriate.  */
7880      if (prev_chain_pointer)
7881	{
7882	  chain_entry->sd_next = chain_pointer;
7883	  prev_chain_pointer->sd_next = chain_entry;
7884	}
7885      else
7886	{
7887	  space_dict_root = chain_entry;
7888	  chain_entry->sd_next = chain_pointer;
7889	}
7890
7891      if (chain_entry->sd_next == NULL)
7892	space_dict_last = chain_entry;
7893    }
7894
7895  /* This is here to catch predefined spaces which do not get
7896     modified by the user's input.  Another call is found at
7897     the bottom of pa_parse_space_stmt to handle cases where
7898     the user modifies a predefined space.  */
7899#ifdef obj_set_section_attributes
7900  obj_set_section_attributes (seg, defined, private, sort, spnum);
7901#endif
7902
7903  return chain_entry;
7904}
7905
7906/* Create a new subspace NAME, with the appropriate flags as defined
7907   by the given parameters.
7908
7909   Add the new subspace to the subspace dictionary chain in numerical
7910   order as defined by the SORT entries.  */
7911
7912static ssd_chain_struct *
7913create_new_subspace (space, name, loadable, code_only, comdat, common,
7914		     dup_common, is_zero, sort, access, space_index,
7915		     alignment, quadrant, seg)
7916     sd_chain_struct *space;
7917     char *name;
7918     int loadable ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7919     int code_only ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7920     int comdat, common, dup_common;
7921     int is_zero ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7922     int sort;
7923     int access;
7924     int space_index ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7925     int alignment ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7926     int quadrant;
7927     asection *seg;
7928{
7929  ssd_chain_struct *chain_entry;
7930
7931  chain_entry = (ssd_chain_struct *) xmalloc (sizeof (ssd_chain_struct));
7932  if (!chain_entry)
7933    as_fatal (_("Out of memory: could not allocate new subspace chain entry: %s\n"), name);
7934
7935  SUBSPACE_NAME (chain_entry) = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (name) + 1);
7936  strcpy (SUBSPACE_NAME (chain_entry), name);
7937
7938  /* Initialize subspace_defined.  When we hit a .subspace directive
7939     we'll set it to 1 which "locks-in" the subspace attributes.  */
7940  SUBSPACE_DEFINED (chain_entry) = 0;
7941
7942  chain_entry->ssd_subseg = 0;
7943  chain_entry->ssd_seg = seg;
7944  chain_entry->ssd_next = NULL;
7945
7946  /* Find spot for the new subspace based on its sort key.  */
7947  if (space->sd_subspaces == NULL)
7948    space->sd_subspaces = chain_entry;
7949  else
7950    {
7951      ssd_chain_struct *chain_pointer;
7952      ssd_chain_struct *prev_chain_pointer;
7953
7954      chain_pointer = space->sd_subspaces;
7955      prev_chain_pointer = NULL;
7956
7957      while (chain_pointer)
7958	{
7959	  prev_chain_pointer = chain_pointer;
7960	  chain_pointer = chain_pointer->ssd_next;
7961	}
7962
7963      /* Now we have somewhere to put the new entry.  Insert it and update
7964         the links.  */
7965      if (prev_chain_pointer)
7966	{
7967	  chain_entry->ssd_next = chain_pointer;
7968	  prev_chain_pointer->ssd_next = chain_entry;
7969	}
7970      else
7971	{
7972	  space->sd_subspaces = chain_entry;
7973	  chain_entry->ssd_next = chain_pointer;
7974	}
7975    }
7976
7977#ifdef obj_set_subsection_attributes
7978  obj_set_subsection_attributes (seg, space->sd_seg, access, sort,
7979				 quadrant, comdat, common, dup_common);
7980#endif
7981
7982  return chain_entry;
7983}
7984
7985/* Update the information for the given subspace based upon the
7986   various arguments.   Return the modified subspace chain entry.  */
7987
7988static ssd_chain_struct *
7989update_subspace (space, name, loadable, code_only, comdat, common, dup_common,
7990		 sort, zero, access, space_index, alignment, quadrant, section)
7991     sd_chain_struct *space;
7992     char *name;
7993     int loadable ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7994     int code_only ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7995     int comdat;
7996     int common;
7997     int dup_common;
7998     int zero ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7999     int sort;
8000     int access;
8001     int space_index ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8002     int alignment ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8003     int quadrant;
8004     asection *section;
8005{
8006  ssd_chain_struct *chain_entry;
8007
8008  chain_entry = is_defined_subspace (name);
8009
8010#ifdef obj_set_subsection_attributes
8011  obj_set_subsection_attributes (section, space->sd_seg, access, sort,
8012				 quadrant, comdat, common, dup_common);
8013#endif
8014
8015  return chain_entry;
8016}
8017
8018/* Return the space chain entry for the space with the name NAME or
8019   NULL if no such space exists.  */
8020
8021static sd_chain_struct *
8022is_defined_space (name)
8023     char *name;
8024{
8025  sd_chain_struct *chain_pointer;
8026
8027  for (chain_pointer = space_dict_root;
8028       chain_pointer;
8029       chain_pointer = chain_pointer->sd_next)
8030    {
8031      if (strcmp (SPACE_NAME (chain_pointer), name) == 0)
8032	return chain_pointer;
8033    }
8034
8035  /* No mapping from segment to space was found.  Return NULL.  */
8036  return NULL;
8037}
8038
8039/* Find and return the space associated with the given seg.  If no mapping
8040   from the given seg to a space is found, then return NULL.
8041
8042   Unlike subspaces, the number of spaces is not expected to grow much,
8043   so a linear exhaustive search is OK here.  */
8044
8045static sd_chain_struct *
8046pa_segment_to_space (seg)
8047     asection *seg;
8048{
8049  sd_chain_struct *space_chain;
8050
8051  /* Walk through each space looking for the correct mapping.  */
8052  for (space_chain = space_dict_root;
8053       space_chain;
8054       space_chain = space_chain->sd_next)
8055    {
8056      if (space_chain->sd_seg == seg)
8057	return space_chain;
8058    }
8059
8060  /* Mapping was not found.  Return NULL.  */
8061  return NULL;
8062}
8063
8064/* Return the first space chain entry for the subspace with the name
8065   NAME or NULL if no such subspace exists.
8066
8067   When there are multiple subspaces with the same name, switching to
8068   the first (i.e., default) subspace is preferable in most situations.
8069   For example, it wouldn't be desirable to merge COMDAT data with non
8070   COMDAT data.
8071
8072   Uses a linear search through all the spaces and subspaces, this may
8073   not be appropriate if we ever being placing each function in its
8074   own subspace.  */
8075
8076static ssd_chain_struct *
8077is_defined_subspace (name)
8078     char *name;
8079{
8080  sd_chain_struct *space_chain;
8081  ssd_chain_struct *subspace_chain;
8082
8083  /* Walk through each space.  */
8084  for (space_chain = space_dict_root;
8085       space_chain;
8086       space_chain = space_chain->sd_next)
8087    {
8088      /* Walk through each subspace looking for a name which matches.  */
8089      for (subspace_chain = space_chain->sd_subspaces;
8090	   subspace_chain;
8091	   subspace_chain = subspace_chain->ssd_next)
8092	if (strcmp (SUBSPACE_NAME (subspace_chain), name) == 0)
8093	  return subspace_chain;
8094    }
8095
8096  /* Subspace wasn't found.  Return NULL.  */
8097  return NULL;
8098}
8099
8100/* Find and return the subspace associated with the given seg.  If no
8101   mapping from the given seg to a subspace is found, then return NULL.
8102
8103   If we ever put each procedure/function within its own subspace
8104   (to make life easier on the compiler and linker), then this will have
8105   to become more efficient.  */
8106
8107static ssd_chain_struct *
8108pa_subsegment_to_subspace (seg, subseg)
8109     asection *seg;
8110     subsegT subseg;
8111{
8112  sd_chain_struct *space_chain;
8113  ssd_chain_struct *subspace_chain;
8114
8115  /* Walk through each space.  */
8116  for (space_chain = space_dict_root;
8117       space_chain;
8118       space_chain = space_chain->sd_next)
8119    {
8120      if (space_chain->sd_seg == seg)
8121	{
8122	  /* Walk through each subspace within each space looking for
8123	     the correct mapping.  */
8124	  for (subspace_chain = space_chain->sd_subspaces;
8125	       subspace_chain;
8126	       subspace_chain = subspace_chain->ssd_next)
8127	    if (subspace_chain->ssd_subseg == (int) subseg)
8128	      return subspace_chain;
8129	}
8130    }
8131
8132  /* No mapping from subsegment to subspace found.  Return NULL.  */
8133  return NULL;
8134}
8135
8136/* Given a number, try and find a space with the name number.
8137
8138   Return a pointer to a space dictionary chain entry for the space
8139   that was found or NULL on failure.  */
8140
8141static sd_chain_struct *
8142pa_find_space_by_number (number)
8143     int number;
8144{
8145  sd_chain_struct *space_chain;
8146
8147  for (space_chain = space_dict_root;
8148       space_chain;
8149       space_chain = space_chain->sd_next)
8150    {
8151      if (SPACE_SPNUM (space_chain) == (unsigned int) number)
8152	return space_chain;
8153    }
8154
8155  /* No appropriate space found.  Return NULL.  */
8156  return NULL;
8157}
8158
8159/* Return the starting address for the given subspace.  If the starting
8160   address is unknown then return zero.  */
8161
8162static unsigned int
8163pa_subspace_start (space, quadrant)
8164     sd_chain_struct *space;
8165     int quadrant;
8166{
8167  /* FIXME.  Assumes everyone puts read/write data at 0x4000000, this
8168     is not correct for the PA OSF1 port.  */
8169  if ((strcmp (SPACE_NAME (space), "$PRIVATE$") == 0) && quadrant == 1)
8170    return 0x40000000;
8171  else if (space->sd_seg == data_section && quadrant == 1)
8172    return 0x40000000;
8173  else
8174    return 0;
8175  return 0;
8176}
8177#endif
8178
8179/* Helper function for pa_stringer.  Used to find the end of
8180   a string.  */
8181
8182static unsigned int
8183pa_stringer_aux (s)
8184     char *s;
8185{
8186  unsigned int c = *s & CHAR_MASK;
8187
8188  switch (c)
8189    {
8190    case '\"':
8191      c = NOT_A_CHAR;
8192      break;
8193    default:
8194      break;
8195    }
8196  return c;
8197}
8198
8199/* Handle a .STRING type pseudo-op.  */
8200
8201static void
8202pa_stringer (append_zero)
8203     int append_zero;
8204{
8205  char *s, num_buf[4];
8206  unsigned int c;
8207  int i;
8208
8209  /* Preprocess the string to handle PA-specific escape sequences.
8210     For example, \xDD where DD is a hexadecimal number should be
8211     changed to \OOO where OOO is an octal number.  */
8212
8213#ifdef OBJ_SOM
8214  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
8215  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
8216#endif
8217
8218  /* Skip the opening quote.  */
8219  s = input_line_pointer + 1;
8220
8221  while (is_a_char (c = pa_stringer_aux (s++)))
8222    {
8223      if (c == '\\')
8224	{
8225	  c = *s;
8226	  switch (c)
8227	    {
8228	      /* Handle \x<num>.  */
8229	    case 'x':
8230	      {
8231		unsigned int number;
8232		int num_digit;
8233		char dg;
8234		char *s_start = s;
8235
8236		/* Get past the 'x'.  */
8237		s++;
8238		for (num_digit = 0, number = 0, dg = *s;
8239		     num_digit < 2
8240		     && (ISDIGIT (dg) || (dg >= 'a' && dg <= 'f')
8241			 || (dg >= 'A' && dg <= 'F'));
8242		     num_digit++)
8243		  {
8244		    if (ISDIGIT (dg))
8245		      number = number * 16 + dg - '0';
8246		    else if (dg >= 'a' && dg <= 'f')
8247		      number = number * 16 + dg - 'a' + 10;
8248		    else
8249		      number = number * 16 + dg - 'A' + 10;
8250
8251		    s++;
8252		    dg = *s;
8253		  }
8254		if (num_digit > 0)
8255		  {
8256		    switch (num_digit)
8257		      {
8258		      case 1:
8259			sprintf (num_buf, "%02o", number);
8260			break;
8261		      case 2:
8262			sprintf (num_buf, "%03o", number);
8263			break;
8264		      }
8265		    for (i = 0; i <= num_digit; i++)
8266		      s_start[i] = num_buf[i];
8267		  }
8268		break;
8269	      }
8270	    /* This might be a "\"", skip over the escaped char.  */
8271	    default:
8272	      s++;
8273	      break;
8274	    }
8275	}
8276    }
8277  stringer (append_zero);
8278  pa_undefine_label ();
8279}
8280
8281/* Handle a .VERSION pseudo-op.  */
8282
8283static void
8284pa_version (unused)
8285     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8286{
8287  obj_version (0);
8288  pa_undefine_label ();
8289}
8290
8291#ifdef OBJ_SOM
8292
8293/* Handle a .COMPILER pseudo-op.  */
8294
8295static void
8296pa_compiler (unused)
8297     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8298{
8299  obj_som_compiler (0);
8300  pa_undefine_label ();
8301}
8302
8303#endif
8304
8305/* Handle a .COPYRIGHT pseudo-op.  */
8306
8307static void
8308pa_copyright (unused)
8309     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8310{
8311  obj_copyright (0);
8312  pa_undefine_label ();
8313}
8314
8315/* Just like a normal cons, but when finished we have to undefine
8316   the latest space label.  */
8317
8318static void
8319pa_cons (nbytes)
8320     int nbytes;
8321{
8322  cons (nbytes);
8323  pa_undefine_label ();
8324}
8325
8326/* Like float_cons, but we need to undefine our label.  */
8327
8328static void
8329pa_float_cons (float_type)
8330     int float_type;
8331{
8332  float_cons (float_type);
8333  pa_undefine_label ();
8334}
8335
8336/* Like s_fill, but delete our label when finished.  */
8337
8338static void
8339pa_fill (unused)
8340     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8341{
8342#ifdef OBJ_SOM
8343  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
8344  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
8345#endif
8346
8347  s_fill (0);
8348  pa_undefine_label ();
8349}
8350
8351/* Like lcomm, but delete our label when finished.  */
8352
8353static void
8354pa_lcomm (needs_align)
8355     int needs_align;
8356{
8357#ifdef OBJ_SOM
8358  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
8359  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
8360#endif
8361
8362  s_lcomm (needs_align);
8363  pa_undefine_label ();
8364}
8365
8366/* Like lsym, but delete our label when finished.  */
8367
8368static void
8369pa_lsym (unused)
8370     int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8371{
8372#ifdef OBJ_SOM
8373  /* We must have a valid space and subspace.  */
8374  pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
8375#endif
8376
8377  s_lsym (0);
8378  pa_undefine_label ();
8379}
8380
8381/* On the PA relocations which involve function symbols must not be
8382   adjusted.  This so that the linker can know when/how to create argument
8383   relocation stubs for indirect calls and calls to static functions.
8384
8385   "T" field selectors create DLT relative fixups for accessing
8386   globals and statics in PIC code; each DLT relative fixup creates
8387   an entry in the DLT table.  The entries contain the address of
8388   the final target (eg accessing "foo" would create a DLT entry
8389   with the address of "foo").
8390
8391   Unfortunately, the HP linker doesn't take into account any addend
8392   when generating the DLT; so accessing $LIT$+8 puts the address of
8393   $LIT$ into the DLT rather than the address of $LIT$+8.
8394
8395   The end result is we can't perform relocation symbol reductions for
8396   any fixup which creates entries in the DLT (eg they use "T" field
8397   selectors).
8398
8399   ??? Reject reductions involving symbols with external scope; such
8400   reductions make life a living hell for object file editors.  */
8401
8402int
8403hppa_fix_adjustable (fixp)
8404     fixS *fixp;
8405{
8406#ifdef OBJ_ELF
8407  reloc_type code;
8408#endif
8409  struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fix;
8410
8411  hppa_fix = (struct hppa_fix_struct *) fixp->tc_fix_data;
8412
8413#ifdef OBJ_ELF
8414  /* LR/RR selectors are implicitly used for a number of different relocation
8415     types.  We must ensure that none of these types are adjusted (see below)
8416     even if they occur with a different selector.  */
8417  code = elf_hppa_reloc_final_type (stdoutput, fixp->fx_r_type,
8418		  		    hppa_fix->fx_r_format,
8419				    hppa_fix->fx_r_field);
8420
8421  switch (code)
8422    {
8423    /* Relocation types which use e_lrsel.  */
8424    case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
8425    case R_PARISC_DLTREL21L:
8426    case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
8427    case R_PARISC_PLTOFF21L:
8428
8429    /* Relocation types which use e_rrsel.  */
8430    case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
8431    case R_PARISC_DIR14DR:
8432    case R_PARISC_DIR14WR:
8433    case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
8434    case R_PARISC_DLTREL14R:
8435    case R_PARISC_DLTREL14DR:
8436    case R_PARISC_DLTREL14WR:
8437    case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
8438    case R_PARISC_DPREL14DR:
8439    case R_PARISC_DPREL14WR:
8440    case R_PARISC_PLTOFF14R:
8441    case R_PARISC_PLTOFF14DR:
8442    case R_PARISC_PLTOFF14WR:
8443
8444    /* Other types that we reject for reduction.  */
8445    case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
8446    case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
8447      return 0;
8448    default:
8449      break;
8450    }
8451#endif
8452
8453  /* Reject reductions of symbols in sym1-sym2 expressions when
8454     the fixup will occur in a CODE subspace.
8455
8456     XXX FIXME: Long term we probably want to reject all of these;
8457     for example reducing in the debug section would lose if we ever
8458     supported using the optimizing hp linker.  */
8459  if (fixp->fx_addsy
8460      && fixp->fx_subsy
8461      && (hppa_fix->segment->flags & SEC_CODE))
8462    return 0;
8463
8464  /* We can't adjust any relocs that use LR% and RR% field selectors.
8465
8466     If a symbol is reduced to a section symbol, the assembler will
8467     adjust the addend unless the symbol happens to reside right at
8468     the start of the section.  Additionally, the linker has no choice
8469     but to manipulate the addends when coalescing input sections for
8470     "ld -r".  Since an LR% field selector is defined to round the
8471     addend, we can't change the addend without risking that a LR% and
8472     it's corresponding (possible multiple) RR% field will no longer
8473     sum to the right value.
8474
8475     eg. Suppose we have
8476     .		ldil	LR%foo+0,%r21
8477     .		ldw	RR%foo+0(%r21),%r26
8478     .		ldw	RR%foo+4(%r21),%r25
8479
8480     If foo is at address 4092 (decimal) in section `sect', then after
8481     reducing to the section symbol we get
8482     .			LR%sect+4092 == (L%sect)+0
8483     .			RR%sect+4092 == (R%sect)+4092
8484     .			RR%sect+4096 == (R%sect)-4096
8485     and the last address loses because rounding the addend to 8k
8486     multiples takes us up to 8192 with an offset of -4096.
8487
8488     In cases where the LR% expression is identical to the RR% one we
8489     will never have a problem, but is so happens that gcc rounds
8490     addends involved in LR% field selectors to work around a HP
8491     linker bug.  ie. We often have addresses like the last case
8492     above where the LR% expression is offset from the RR% one.  */
8493
8494  if (hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_lrsel
8495      || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_rrsel
8496      || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_nlrsel)
8497    return 0;
8498
8499  /* Reject reductions of symbols in DLT relative relocs,
8500     relocations with plabels.  */
8501  if (hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_tsel
8502      || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_ltsel
8503      || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_rtsel
8504      || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_psel
8505      || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_rpsel
8506      || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_lpsel)
8507    return 0;
8508
8509  /* Reject absolute calls (jumps).  */
8510  if (hppa_fix->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_ABS_CALL)
8511    return 0;
8512
8513  /* Reject reductions of function symbols.  */
8514  if (fixp->fx_addsy != 0 && S_IS_FUNCTION (fixp->fx_addsy))
8515    return 0;
8516
8517  return 1;
8518}
8519
8520/* Return nonzero if the fixup in FIXP will require a relocation,
8521   even it if appears that the fixup could be completely handled
8522   within GAS.  */
8523
8524int
8525hppa_force_relocation (fixp)
8526     struct fix *fixp;
8527{
8528  struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fixp;
8529
8530  hppa_fixp = (struct hppa_fix_struct *) fixp->tc_fix_data;
8531#ifdef OBJ_SOM
8532  if (fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_ENTRY
8533      || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_EXIT
8534      || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_BEGIN_BRTAB
8535      || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_END_BRTAB
8536      || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_BEGIN_TRY
8537      || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_END_TRY
8538      || (fixp->fx_addsy != NULL && fixp->fx_subsy != NULL
8539	  && (hppa_fixp->segment->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0))
8540    return 1;
8541#endif
8542#ifdef OBJ_ELF
8543  if (fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT
8544      || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY)
8545    return 1;
8546#endif
8547
8548  assert (fixp->fx_addsy != NULL);
8549
8550  /* Ensure we emit a relocation for global symbols so that dynamic
8551     linking works.  */
8552  if (S_FORCE_RELOC (fixp->fx_addsy, 1))
8553    return 1;
8554
8555  /* It is necessary to force PC-relative calls/jumps to have a relocation
8556     entry if they're going to need either an argument relocation or long
8557     call stub.  */
8558  if (fixp->fx_pcrel
8559      && arg_reloc_stub_needed (symbol_arg_reloc_info (fixp->fx_addsy),
8560				hppa_fixp->fx_arg_reloc))
8561    return 1;
8562
8563  /* Now check to see if we're going to need a long-branch stub.  */
8564  if (fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL)
8565    {
8566      long pc = md_pcrel_from (fixp);
8567      valueT distance, min_stub_distance;
8568
8569      distance = fixp->fx_offset + S_GET_VALUE (fixp->fx_addsy) - pc - 8;
8570
8571      /* Distance to the closest possible stub.  This will detect most
8572	 but not all circumstances where a stub will not work.  */
8573      min_stub_distance = pc + 16;
8574#ifdef OBJ_SOM
8575      if (last_call_info != NULL)
8576	min_stub_distance -= S_GET_VALUE (last_call_info->start_symbol);
8577#endif
8578
8579      if ((distance + 8388608 >= 16777216
8580	   && min_stub_distance <= 8388608)
8581	  || (hppa_fixp->fx_r_format == 17
8582	      && distance + 262144 >= 524288
8583	      && min_stub_distance <= 262144)
8584	  || (hppa_fixp->fx_r_format == 12
8585	      && distance + 8192 >= 16384
8586	      && min_stub_distance <= 8192)
8587	  )
8588	return 1;
8589    }
8590
8591  if (fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_ABS_CALL)
8592    return 1;
8593
8594  /* No need (yet) to force another relocations to be emitted.  */
8595  return 0;
8596}
8597
8598/* Now for some ELF specific code.  FIXME.  */
8599#ifdef OBJ_ELF
8600/* Mark the end of a function so that it's possible to compute
8601   the size of the function in elf_hppa_final_processing.  */
8602
8603static void
8604hppa_elf_mark_end_of_function ()
8605{
8606  /* ELF does not have EXIT relocations.  All we do is create a
8607     temporary symbol marking the end of the function.  */
8608  char *name;
8609
8610  if (last_call_info == NULL || last_call_info->start_symbol == NULL)
8611    {
8612      /* We have already warned about a missing label,
8613	 or other problems.  */
8614      return;
8615    }
8616
8617  name = (char *) xmalloc (strlen ("L$\001end_")
8618			   + strlen (S_GET_NAME (last_call_info->start_symbol))
8619			   + 1);
8620  if (name)
8621    {
8622      symbolS *symbolP;
8623
8624      strcpy (name, "L$\001end_");
8625      strcat (name, S_GET_NAME (last_call_info->start_symbol));
8626
8627      /* If we have a .exit followed by a .procend, then the
8628	 symbol will have already been defined.  */
8629      symbolP = symbol_find (name);
8630      if (symbolP)
8631	{
8632	  /* The symbol has already been defined!  This can
8633	     happen if we have a .exit followed by a .procend.
8634
8635	     This is *not* an error.  All we want to do is free
8636	     the memory we just allocated for the name and continue.  */
8637	  xfree (name);
8638	}
8639      else
8640	{
8641	  /* symbol value should be the offset of the
8642	     last instruction of the function */
8643	  symbolP = symbol_new (name, now_seg, (valueT) (frag_now_fix () - 4),
8644				frag_now);
8645
8646	  assert (symbolP);
8647	  S_CLEAR_EXTERNAL (symbolP);
8648	  symbol_table_insert (symbolP);
8649	}
8650
8651      if (symbolP)
8652	last_call_info->end_symbol = symbolP;
8653      else
8654	as_bad (_("Symbol '%s' could not be created."), name);
8655
8656    }
8657  else
8658    as_bad (_("No memory for symbol name."));
8659
8660}
8661
8662/* For ELF, this function serves one purpose:  to setup the st_size
8663   field of STT_FUNC symbols.  To do this, we need to scan the
8664   call_info structure list, determining st_size in by taking the
8665   difference in the address of the beginning/end marker symbols.  */
8666
8667void
8668elf_hppa_final_processing ()
8669{
8670  struct call_info *call_info_pointer;
8671
8672  for (call_info_pointer = call_info_root;
8673       call_info_pointer;
8674       call_info_pointer = call_info_pointer->ci_next)
8675    {
8676      elf_symbol_type *esym
8677	= ((elf_symbol_type *)
8678	   symbol_get_bfdsym (call_info_pointer->start_symbol));
8679      esym->internal_elf_sym.st_size =
8680	S_GET_VALUE (call_info_pointer->end_symbol)
8681	- S_GET_VALUE (call_info_pointer->start_symbol) + 4;
8682    }
8683}
8684
8685static void
8686pa_vtable_entry (ignore)
8687     int ignore ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8688{
8689  struct fix *new_fix;
8690
8691  new_fix = obj_elf_vtable_entry (0);
8692
8693  if (new_fix)
8694    {
8695      struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fix = (struct hppa_fix_struct *)
8696	obstack_alloc (&notes, sizeof (struct hppa_fix_struct));
8697      hppa_fix->fx_r_type = R_HPPA;
8698      hppa_fix->fx_r_field = e_fsel;
8699      hppa_fix->fx_r_format = 32;
8700      hppa_fix->fx_arg_reloc = 0;
8701      hppa_fix->segment = now_seg;
8702      new_fix->tc_fix_data = (void *) hppa_fix;
8703      new_fix->fx_r_type = (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY;
8704    }
8705}
8706
8707static void
8708pa_vtable_inherit (ignore)
8709     int ignore ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8710{
8711  struct fix *new_fix;
8712
8713  new_fix = obj_elf_vtable_inherit (0);
8714
8715  if (new_fix)
8716    {
8717      struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fix = (struct hppa_fix_struct *)
8718	obstack_alloc (&notes, sizeof (struct hppa_fix_struct));
8719      hppa_fix->fx_r_type = R_HPPA;
8720      hppa_fix->fx_r_field = e_fsel;
8721      hppa_fix->fx_r_format = 32;
8722      hppa_fix->fx_arg_reloc = 0;
8723      hppa_fix->segment = now_seg;
8724      new_fix->tc_fix_data = (void *) hppa_fix;
8725      new_fix->fx_r_type = (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT;
8726    }
8727}
8728#endif
8729